JP2021003619A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of displaying an image at time when the image should be displayed without any problems even if storage means having a slow read speed is used as storage means of image information.SOLUTION: At least partial image data are transferred to a resident video RAM 189 during initialization immediately after power on to be resident. Thus, after completion of the initialization processing, drawing processing of an image can be performed by an image controller 188 while using image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. Therefore, since corresponding image data need not be read from a character ROM 187 composed of a NAND-type flash memory 187a having a slow read speed in image drawing, time required for the reading can be abbreviated, thus displaying an image drawn on an auxiliary display part 65 by instantly drawing the image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, the image information of the image to be displayed on the display device is stored in the storage means in advance, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read from the storage means to perform image processing. After applying the image, the display device is configured to display the image.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-223598

By the way, as a storage means for storing image information for displaying an image on a display device, one having a slow speed (reading speed) for reading information is generally used. When such a storage means is used, if the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means after the image to be displayed is specified, the image to be displayed cannot be generated in time by the time to be displayed, and that time. There was a problem that the image could not be displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of displaying an image without any problem.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a main control means that performs main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a sub control thereof. An image display means for displaying an image based on control by means is provided, and the image display means dynamically displays identification information, and the sub-control means displays an image on the image display means. A first storage means in which image information to be displayed is stored, and a second storage means that can read out at a higher speed than the first storage means and store the image information stored in the first storage means. A third storage means that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the first storage means and stores image information stored in the first storage means, and at least the second storage means and the third storage means. An image control means that controls an image to be displayed on the image display means based on the image information stored in the first storage means, and a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means. When the first transfer processing executing means for executing the first transfer processing and the image information not held in the second storage means are used for image control by the image control means, the image information is before being used. A determination is made regarding the second transfer processing executing means for executing the second transfer processing for transferring the image information from the first storage means to the third storage means and the type of the image information stored in the third storage means. A determination means, a first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of display types are provided for each of the display types. The first specified information indicating the information indicating the image to be displayed and the information for transferring the image information to be transferred to the third storage means among the image information used for controlling the image by the image control means. A first specified information storage means for storing and a first selection means for selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the first display specifying means from the first specified information storage means are provided. The second storage means retains the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined opportunity is set, and the image information transferred to the third storage means is different. It is retained until it is overwritten by the image information, and the image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means. The first transfer process includes at least a part of image information necessary for displaying a back image to be displayed on the back side of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the image display means, and the first storage means. To the second storage means, and the second transfer processing execution means identifies the image information to be transferred to the third storage means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means. Then, before the image information is used for controlling the image by the image control means, the second transfer process is executed so as to transfer the image information from the first storage means to the third storage means. 3 If the image information to be transferred to the storage means is stored in the third storage means based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the second transfer process is not executed, and the sub The control means is used at least when the second transfer process is executed, and the image information read from the first storage means is temporarily stored before being written to the third storage means. Equipped with storage means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a main control means that performs main control of a game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image based on the control by the sub control means. The image display means is provided with an image display means for displaying the identification information, and the sub-control means is provided with image information for causing the image display means to display an image. A first storage means stored, a second storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and storing image information stored in the first storage means, and the first storage means. A third storage means that can read out at a higher speed than that and stores the image information stored in the first storage means, and at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means. Based on this, an image control means that controls an image to be displayed on the image display means and a first transfer process that transfers a part of the image information stored in the first storage means to the second storage means are executed. When image information that is not retained by the first transfer processing execution means and the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the first storage means to the first storage means before the image information is used. (3) A plurality of displays, a second transfer process executing means for executing a second transfer process for transferring the image information to the storage means, a determination means for determining the type of image information stored in the third storage means, and a plurality of displays. A first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from among the modes, and information provided for each of the plurality of the display types and indicating an image to be displayed in the display type. The first specified information storage for storing the first specified information indicating the image information used for controlling the image by the image controlling means and the information for transferring the image information to be transferred to the third storage means. The second storage means includes means and a first selection means for selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the first display specifying means from the first specified information storage means. Until at least a predetermined opportunity is reached, the image information transferred by the first transfer processing executing means is retained, and the image information transferred to the third storage means is overwritten by another image information. The image control means continues to be held, and the image control means controls an image to be displayed on the image display means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, and the first transfer process is performed. Said Transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means, including at least a part of the image information necessary for displaying the back image to be displayed on the back side of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the image display means. Then, the second transfer processing executing means identifies the image information to be transferred to the third storage means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, and the image information is used as the image. An image to be transferred to the third storage means, which executes the second transfer process so as to transfer from the first storage means to the third storage means before being used for controlling an image by the control means. If the information is stored in the third storage means based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the second transfer process is not executed, and the sub-control means is at least the second. An image is stored because it includes a fourth storage means that is used when the transfer process is executed and that the image information read from the first storage means is temporarily stored before being written to the third storage means. It has the effect of being able to be displayed without problems.

It is a perspective view of the slot machine in the state which the front door is closed in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is an array diagram which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be seen from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode, the stop symbol corresponding to the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a slot machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a three-sheet hanging lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a two-sheet hanging lottery table, and (c) is one sheet. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of hanging. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the scanning area of the screen which the auxiliary display part has, and the display area which an image is actually displayed on the screen. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery table setting process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the display main processing executed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start command processing executed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result command processing executed by MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing executed by the MPU of a display control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of the hold count command. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the range of the background image stored in the resident video RAM. It is a figure which shows typically the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device, and the effective line setting. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the effect execution time table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of the continuous notice setting command. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of the variation pattern command for display. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the image drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the image drawing process at power-on which is executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the image transfer command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer instruction processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the background image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the image transfer process which is executed by the image controller in a display control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 21, as a first embodiment, a rotating cylinder type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, an embodiment when applied to a slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. It is a front view of the body 11.

In the slot machine 10, the player inserts a medal, which is a game medium, from the medal insertion slot 45, and the start lever 41 is operated to rotate and drive three reels 32L, 32M, 32R having a plurality of symbols. When the player operates the stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, the player is given a privilege of awarding a predetermined number of medals and a privilege of shifting to a gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front as a whole by combining wooden panels, and is attached by nailing a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall. In addition to being made of wooden panels, the housing 11 may be made of synthetic resin panels or metal panels, or may be made of synthetic resin materials or metal materials to form an integral box. May be good.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12.

Further, on the opposite side of the opening / closing shaft of the front door 12, a locking device 20 is provided on the back surface thereof, and the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is a thin upper position in the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the key cylinder 21 is an OMlock (registered trademark) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving the stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, but 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and three consecutive symbols are displayed windows 26L, 26M, It is configured to be visible at the upper, middle, and lower positions of the 26R. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 is a lever that is manually pushed (the direction in which the player is pushed is not limited) when the player starts the game, and is operated by the start lever 41 with a predetermined number of medals inserted. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started all at once (however, they do not have to be simultaneous).

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped.

At this time, only the stop mode in which the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (in the present embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) is stopped as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Instead, the corresponding reel is slid by one symbol and then stopped, two symbols are slid and then stopped, three symbols are slid and then stopped, and four symbols are slid. Five patterns are prepared with a stop mode in which the machine is stopped after being set. As a result, the display windows are set so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in a predetermined stop mode between the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the time when the specified time (190 msec) elapses. It is possible to give the player the impression that the symbol arrangement (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop roll) that stops within a visible range from the 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the operation of the player. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to 4 symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode (see FIG. 7) described later, which won the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, will be described later. It is possible to stop on the effective line (see FIG. 6), and it is possible to prevent the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning modes that have not won the lottery from stopping on the effective line.

On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The storage passage 47 is provided with an inserted medal detection device (not shown) that detects the passage of inserted medals. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. Further, the movement of the inserted medal (the passing direction of the medal) is determined based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device, and when the movement of the medal is different from the normal one, the main control device 101 may be clogged with the medal or It is configured to notify that a sensor error has occurred from the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc., which will be described later, by determining that there is a possibility that a medal has been pulled out or other fraudulent activity has been performed. There is.

The inserted medal detection device includes a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor composed of a photocoupler having a pair of light emitting parts and light receiving parts (not shown) on both sides of the passing medal. It is equipped with 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are arranged side by side on the upstream side and the downstream side, respectively, in a state where they can detect one passing medal at the same time. For example, each medal is thrown. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a "Lo" signal when receiving light and a "Hi" signal when blocking light.

When the medal inserted by the player is guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medal passes through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side is in a light-shielded state first to output a "Hi" signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor arranged on the downstream side is output. The 45b is in a light-shielded state, a "Hi" signal is output, and medals are simultaneously detected by the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. Then, when the medal further advances to the downstream side in the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side first enters the light receiving state and outputs the "Lo" signal, and then outputs the "Lo" signal. The second inserted medal detection sensor 45b arranged on the downstream side is in a light receiving state and outputs a "Lo" signal.

That is, when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are such that the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a first becomes "Hi" and then the second inserted medal. The detection sensor 45b becomes "Hi". Then, after the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are simultaneously set to "Hi", the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is set to "Lo", and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is set to "Lo". In the main control device 101, when the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, it is determined that the medals have been inserted normally, and the number of inserted medals is counted. Up.

On the other hand, if the medal is jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device or the medal is illegally pulled out, the signals output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are different from the case where the medal has passed normally. It changes at different timings. The main control device 101 monitors changes in the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the change is different from the change when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the medal It is determined that there is clogging or fraud, and the occurrence of a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81 described later by an error command. In the display control device 81, when the main control device 101 notifies the occurrence of the sensor error, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like notify the occurrence of the sensor error.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, an induction plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the checkout switch 59 is operated under the above-mentioned situation, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the bonus state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and for notifying the state when the power is turned on or an error occurs, and the game is mainly performed by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since it can be considered that it is due to the display unit, it is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65 in the present embodiment. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided. Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Above the medal tray 50, a lower plate 66 on which a model name, characters related to the game, and the like are displayed is mounted. Further, on the left side of the medal tray 50, an ashtray 69 that can be inverted is provided on the lower front side.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8), and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101 described later.

The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, maintains the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery). You can do it. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory, but if the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( It is supposed to be initialized). If the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is on, the error state is reset.

The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotates the slot machine 10 to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of the winning probability of each winning mode) from "setting 1" to "setting 6". Can be changed up to. Then, when the setting state is set to "setting 1", a lottery is performed so that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to "setting 6", the winning mode (combination) is drawn. The lottery of the winning mode is configured so that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, but the main control device 101 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 102 that controls the main control, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores the game program, and a game progress. RAM (Random Access Memory) 106 that temporarily stores necessary data, free run counter 107 that generates random numbers, port 104 that communicates with various devices, clock used for time counting and synchronization, etc. It includes a main board including a circuit 103 and the like, and the main board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. These box bases and box covers are unopenably connected by a sealing unit, thereby sealing the board box. In addition, the box base and the box cover may be connected by using a key member so as not to be opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 5 is an array diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include "7" symbol (for example, 20th on left reel 32L), "youth" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "replay" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), and " "Cherry" symbol (eg 17th on left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (eg 16th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg 15th on left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (eg 15th on left reel 32L) , 19th of the middle reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols are visible. Here, the combination line set in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbol visible from each display window 26L, 26M, 26R and the combination line.

As shown in FIG. 6, the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right. Middle line L2 connecting the middle design of reel 32R, lower design of left reel 32L, lower design of middle reel 32M, lower line L3 connecting lower design of right reel 32R, upper design of left reel 32L, middle reel A right-down line L4 connecting the lower design of the right reel 32R and the middle design of 32M, and a right-up line L5 connecting the lower design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the upper design of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the valid line, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals or the privilege of shifting the game state is given as the winning is established. It is designed to be granted.

The maximum number of combination lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5. Further, the maximum number of combination lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (inverted V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as an effective line.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the winning modes that the slot machine 10 can take, the stop symbols on the effective line that wins in each winning mode, the winning probabilities of each winning mode in the general gaming state, and each The number of medals to be paid out when a prize is won in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode, the stopped symbol, the winning probability in the general game state, and the number of medals paid out. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to "setting 1" will be described as an example, but when the setting state is set to "setting 2" to "setting 6". In addition, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" while maintaining the magnitude relationship of each winning probability determined by each winning mode and the number of medals inserted (number of bets). Each winning probability is set so that

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a state transition prize that gives the player a privilege to shift the game state. When the "7" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "7" symbol are stopped side by side on the effective line from the left, the privilege of shifting the gaming state to the bonus state, which is the special gaming state, is given as a BB prize. However, even if the "7" symbol stops alongside the left, middle, and right on the effective line, the medal will not be paid out. That is, when the combination of "7" symbols is established on the effective line, it only shifts to the bonus state. In other words, it can be said that the "7" symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the bonus state.

Here, the bonus state will be described. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the probability of winning the watermelon prize and the bell prize, which will be described later, which are small wins, is extremely high as compared with the general gaming state. Then, if the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state ends even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (250 in the present embodiment). That is, when the BB prize is established, the number of medals paid out at that time is 0, but when the game state of the gaming machine is changed to the bonus state with the BB prize, 250 medals are given to the player. It is guaranteed that the payout will be made with a smaller number of medals inserted than in the general game state. In addition, when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a device for suppressing the gambling spirit of the player and ensuring the soundness of the game by setting an upper limit on the number of medals paid out in the bonus state. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols that shift to the RB state is not set, and the configuration shifts to the RB state immediately after the transition to the bonus state and immediately after the end of the RB state. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game in which the game continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

This slot machine 10 supports 1-card, 2-card, and 3-card medals (number of bets) at the start of the game, and the probability of winning a BB prize in a general game state (BB prize in one game). (Probability of establishing) is set differently according to the number of medals inserted (number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. Specifically, in the case of 1-card and 2-card, the winning probability of BB winning is set to 1/65536, and in the case of 3-card, it is set to 1/256. As described above, the winning probability of the BB winning in the general game state is set lower in the case of 1-card and 2-card than in the case of 3-card.

Next, there are a watermelon prize and a bell prize as small role prizes in which medals are paid out. If you stop alongside the "watermelon" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol on the effective line, you will win a watermelon prize, and from the left on the effective line, the "bell" symbol, "bell" symbol, and " If you stop alongside the "bell" symbol, you will win a bell. Then, when the game is executed with three medals, if the watermelon prize is established, 12 medals are paid out, and if the bell prize is established, 6 medals are paid out. In addition, when the game is executed with one or two medals, if the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of winning a watermelon in a general game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1-card and 2-card, and 1/8 in the case of 3-card. On the other hand, the winning probability of the bell winning in the general game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1-card and 2-card, and to 1 / 5.1 in the case of 3-card. In this way, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set so that the prizes can be easily established in the case of three pieces, while the prizes are rarely established in the case of one piece and two pieces. It is set not to.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, a special small winning combination prize is prepared that is established only when the game is executed with one or two cards, or only when the game is executed with one card. .. Special child actor prizes include cherry bell prizes and 7 bell prizes. Of these, the cherry bell prize is a special small winning combination that is established only when one or two medals are hung, and the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. It is established when the game stops at, and three medals are paid out. In addition, the 7-bell prize is a special small winning combination that is established only when one piece is hung, and when the "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line. It is established and two medals are paid out.

Here, for both the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning, the symbol that stops on the effective line of the right reel 32R may be any symbol. In addition, when the game is executed with three cards, the cherry bell wins even if the "watermelon" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line. Or, it is judged as a loss without establishing a 7-bell prize. Similarly, when the game is executed with two reels, even if the "7" symbol on the reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line, the 7-bell prize is not established. , Judge as off. If the game is executed with 3 reels, the "cherry" or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the effective line at the same time, and the cherry is won. Or 7 bells may be configured so that the prize is not established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two reels, the "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the effective line at the same time so that the cherry prize is not established. It may be configured as.

The winning probability of winning the cherry bell in the general game state is set to about 1/6.0 in the case of 1-card, and about 1 / 1.8 in the case of 2-card. In addition, the winning probability of winning 7 bells in the general game state is set to about 1/6.0 with respect to only one piece.

By the way, in the conventional slot machine, when the game is executed with one or two cards, the probability that various benefits are given is extremely low as compared with the case where the game is executed with three cards. There were some machines that were set, or that could not play a game with one or two cards, and could only play a game with three cards. This is done as a device for increasing the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall, and aims to make the player play one game with three medals as much as possible.

However, the number of medals lent out from the hall before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, and is generally lent out in units of 50 medals, so there is a high probability that the number of medals will be less than 3 in the hands of the player. There was a possibility that it would remain. And if there are less than 3 medals left in hand, the game cannot be played with the remaining medals on the 3-card dedicated machine, and a slot machine that can hang 1 or 2 medals. However, since the probability that the privilege will be given is low, there is a risk that the medal may be left in the hall or the player may bring back the remaining medal. If the medal is left in the hall, the player loses the value of the medal, and if the player brings back the remaining medal, the medal lent out in the hall cannot be collected, and the game There is a risk that a person may play a game using a medal brought back from another hole, and there is a problem that the hole side also suffers damage.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, when the game is played with two cards, the cherry bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1/1.8, and when the game is played with one card. With a high probability of about 1/6.0, the Cherry Bell prize is established and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, even if the winning probability of the BB prize in the case of one or two medals is suppressed to be extremely low, one or two medals remain in the player's hand. In addition, it is possible to have the player execute the game by playing one or two medals while having the expectation that the cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out will be established. Then, as a result of this game, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, three medals will be paid out, so that the player can use the three medals under more advantageous conditions than one or two medals. You can play the game with the expectation that the BB prize will be won. Further, even if the game is out of order, the game can be ended without leaving an extra medal for the player.

In addition, when the game is played with one card, a 7-bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1/6.0, and two medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal remains in the player's hand, three medals are paid out, and two medals are paid out with the expectation that the cherry bell winning will be established. It is possible to have the player execute the game by playing one card while giving a feeling of expectation that the 7-bell prize will be established. Then, as a result of this game, if a 7-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out, so that the player uses the two medals to pay out three more medals. You can enjoy the game while having the expectation of winning.

In this way, even if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, three medals are paid out using the one or two medals, or two medals are awarded. Players can be made to play the game aiming for a 7-bell prize in which medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up the medals without leaving any extra medals.

Here, referring to FIG. 5 again, in the reels 32L and 32M of the left reel 32L "cherry" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the middle reel 32M "bell" symbol, respectively, in which the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning are established. The arrangement position will be briefly described.

First, in the left reel 32L, the "cherry" symbol is arranged so that the distance between the symbol that arrives first in the lower row and the symbol that arrives next is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd "cherry" symbol and the 10th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the distance between them is 7 symbols. In addition, since the 0th and 20th of each reel are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the interval between the 17th "cherry" symbol and the 3rd "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L is 7 symbols. ing. On the other hand, the "7" symbol is also arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that arrives next is 7 symbols. For example, the 6th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the 13th "7" symbol are arranged so that the distance between them is 7 symbols, and the 20th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L The 6th "7" symbol is also arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols.

As described above, both the "cherry" symbol and the "7" symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 7 symbols. As described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol is used when the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is established. The display window 26L can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions.

For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 3rd "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, this "cherry" symbol can be stopped at the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 4th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 10th "replay" The "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 5th "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If you stop it later, you can stop the 10th "cherry" symbol in the middle.

Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 6th "7" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, this "7" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 7th "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 13th "watermelon" 7 ”The symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 8th“ replay ”symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If it is stopped later, the 13th "7" symbol can be stopped in the middle stage.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, the "bell" symbol is arranged so that the distance between the symbol that arrives first in the lower row and the symbol that arrives next is 5 or less. For example, the 0th "bell" symbol and the 5th "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M are arranged so that the distance between them is 5 symbols, and the 9th "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M is arranged. And the 12th "bell" symbol are arranged so that the interval between them is 3 symbols. In this way, the "bell" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 5 or less, so that the middle stop switch 43 can be operated at any timing by using such a symbol arrangement. Even if this is done, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning is established.

For example, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th "7" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is, this "bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 12th "bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 17th "bell" symbol is displayed. The "bell" symbol can be stopped in the middle.

In this way, regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated, the "cherry" symbol or the "7" symbol can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display window 26L. It is also possible to display a "bell" pattern in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, if a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize is won in the lottery of the winning mode, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is supported regardless of the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on any of the middle line L2, the right-down line L4, and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6), it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize without so-called omission.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. As another winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, a replay winning is provided when the slot machine 10 is stopped alongside the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol from the left on the effective line. When the replay prize is established, the player can play the next game without reducing the number of medals possessed and without inserting medals, although the medals are not paid out or the state is changed. Therefore, if the replay prize is established, the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted in the game will be paid out, that is, one for one medals, two for two, and three medals. In the case of, it can be considered that three medals are paid out. The probability of winning a replay prize in a general game state is not limited to the number of medals inserted (number of bets), but is as high as about 1/7.3 in any case of 1-card, 2-card, or 3-card. It is set to probability. By establishing this replay prize with a high probability, you want to establish a BB prize or a special small role prize (cherry bell prize or 7 bell prize) if you play the game with 1 or 2 cards. A sense of challenge can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 5, the "replay" symbols that establish the replay prize are the reels 32L and 32M so that the distance between the symbol that arrives first in the lower row and the symbol that arrives next is 5 or less. , 32R. For example, the 8th "replay" symbol and the 11th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the intervals are 3 symbols, and the 1st "replay" symbol and 6 on the middle reel 32M. The numbered "replay" symbols are arranged so that the intervals are 5 symbols. As described above, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 5 or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding the stop switches 42 to 44 by a maximum of four symbols from the operated timing. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, the stop switches 42 to 44 can be stopped. Regardless of the timing of the operation, the "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R when the replay winning is established. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 3rd "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the 4th "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 1st "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped. "Replay" symbol can be stopped in the middle. Therefore, when the replay prize is won, the "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, the replay winning can be established without so-called omission.

In other cases, that is, if the combination of the above symbols does not stop on the effective line, the medal is not paid out or the game state is not changed at all, and the game is lost. That is, the "youth" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the "star" symbol of the middle reel 32M are not involved in winning at all. In other words, it can be said that each of the above symbols is a non-privilege symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. That is, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided with a privilege symbol related to winning, for example, a "bell" symbol, and a non-privilege symbol unrelated to winning, such as a "youth" symbol. In the following, the combination of each winning symbol and the corresponding symbol will also be referred to as a winning symbol combination. For example, the combination of BB symbols is a combination of symbols that wins a BB prize, that is, a combination of "7" symbols, "7" symbols, and "7" symbols.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals is sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Since it is set, it is possible to let the player insert three medals and play one game while expecting the player to get a lot of medals by winning the BB prize. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of slot machines in the hall.

On the other hand, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with three medals paid out is set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high, so that the game If one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player is expected to pay out three medals by winning the Cherry Bell prize, and one or two medals remaining in the hand. Can be thrown in to play one game. As a result, if three medals are paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the establishment of the BB prize. , The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is different, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. In this way, the slot machine 10 allows the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Then, there is a problem that the player loses by finishing the game without using the rented medal, the player cannot bring back the remaining medals and collect the rented medals, or brought them back from another hall. By using the medals by the player, it is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side suffers damage.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell prize with two medals paid out is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is also set high, so that the player has a hand. If one medal remains in the game, the player is expected to pay out two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, and the remaining one medal is inserted once. You can play the game. As a result, if two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the cherry-bell prize to be established in which three more medals are paid out. , You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game, and even if you miss it, you can use up the medals. Therefore, while giving the player more enjoyment of the game, it is possible to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

In addition, in the lottery of the winning mode, when the cherry bell winning in which three medals are paid out or the seven bell winning in which two medals are paid out are won, regardless of the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , Since the stop symbol can be stopped on the effective line without missing, as a result of the lottery of the game started by the player with 1 and 2 medals, the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize were won as winning medals. In that case, those prizes can be surely established without relying on artificial operations. In addition, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize will be established while aiming for other prizes (for example, BB prize).

Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the general game state in the case of one-card hang and the case of two-card hang will be described. First, in the case of one-card medals, the winning probability of watermelon winning and bell winning in the general game state is set to 1/65536, and if any of the winnings is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probabilities of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning in the general game state are set to about 1/6.0, respectively, and when the cherry bell winning is established, 3 medals and the 7 bell winning are established. Two medals will be paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay winning in the general gaming state is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is established, it is equivalent to the one in which one medal is paid out as described above. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability of the BB prize in the general game state is set to 1/65536, and when the BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is 0. Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under the general gaming state is equal to the value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the above winning probabilities and adding these multiplication results, and in one-card multiplication. The expected value is about 0.96. That is, in the general game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (1) is about 96%, and it is expected that the number of medals owned by the player decreases by about 0.04 for each game played. ..

Further, in the case of two medals, the winning probability of the watermelon winning and the bell winning in the general game state is set to 1/65536, and if any of the winnings is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the cherry bell winning in the general game state is set to about 1 / 1.8, and when the cherry bell winning is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of the replay winning in the general game state is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is established, it is equivalent to the one in which two medals are paid out as described above. I can think. On the other hand, the winning probability of the BB prize in the general game state is set to 1/65536, and when the BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals paid out is 0. Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under the general gaming state in which two medals are played is about 1.94. That is, in the general game state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (2) is about 97%, and it is expected that the number of medals owned by the player decreases by about 0.06 for each game played. ..

In this way, in both cases of 1-card and 2-card, the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is set to a value as close to 100% as possible. If this is done, the medal will be returned to the player with an expected value of almost 100%. That is, even if the game is played with one or two medals, the number of medals hardly decreases, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player has one remaining in the hand. Or you can be sure that you want to play a game with two medals. Therefore, the possibility that the player finishes the game by leaving the medal can be further reduced.

On the other hand, when the game is played with one or two medals, it is expected that the number of medals will decrease slightly, so if the game is repeated with one or two medals, the number of medals will increase. Instead, it is decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly playing the game with one or two medals and aiming for an increase in medals. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, the player can be made to play the game with three medals having a high probability of winning the BB prize.

In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established by playing the game with one or two medals is set to three, which is the maximum number of bets, and the game is played with one medals. The number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set to 2, but the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry-bell prize is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set to 2. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if the number of medals to be paid out is set to 3 or 2 when the cherry bell prize or 7 bell prize is established, even if the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to less than 100%, each prize will be won. The winning probability can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established, and it is possible to increase the probability that 3 or 2 medals will be given to the player, so that 1 or 2 medals will be given to the player. You can use the medals to make you want to play the game.

FIG. 7 shows the winning probability when the setting state is "setting 1", but even when the setting state is set to any of "setting 2" to "setting 6", one piece is hung and The winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two-card hang is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In the present embodiment, the winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of one-card or two-card is changed according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”), but one card is used. The winning probability of the multiplication and the two-card multiplication may be constant regardless of the set state. That is, the winning probability may be changed according to the set state only in the case of three cards. In addition, in the case of 1-card and 2-card hanging, the winning probability of at least one of BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning and replay winning is determined according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"". Although it is changed, the winning probabilities of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning, which are special small winning combination prizes in the case of 1-card and 2-card, are not changed and may be a constant value.

In addition, in this slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the cherry bell winning is played with one or two cards, and when the game is played with three cards, the left reel 32L. Even if the "cherry" symbol is stopped and the "bell" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, the cherry bell prize is not established and it is treated as a miss. It is possible to draw attention to the player as a winning combination. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops at the cherry bell winning stop symbol, the player can be greatly delighted.

Similarly, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one 7-bell prize, and when the game is played with two or three cards, the left reel 32L has a "7" symbol. Even if the "bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell prize will not be established and will be treated as a miss, so the player will be told that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. It can be noticed. Therefore, when the game is played with one card, if the symbol stops at the 7-bell winning stop symbol, the player can be greatly delighted.

Further, in the slot machine 10, even when the game is played with one or two cards, the BB prize is set so as to be established, although the winning probability is extremely low. As a result, even when the game is played with one or two cards, the player can have a sense of expectation that the BB prize will be established.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the game is played with one or two medals, the watermelon prize or the bell prize, which is a normal small role prize other than the BB prize or the replay prize, is established. However, unlike the number of medals paid out when the game is played with three medals, three medals are paid out in the same way as when the Cherry Bell prize is established. By inserting the three medals, the player can play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established, and the player can surely enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. it can. Further, in this slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon prize or a bell prize is lowered when the game is played with one or two cards, while the probability of winning a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize is set high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning is a special small role winning with one or two slots, and one or two slots. When the game is played in, the player can have a sense of expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the MPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the MPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, first insertion medal detection sensor 45a and second insertion medal detection sensor 45b for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, credit insertion detection sensors 56a to 58a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion switch 56 to 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, Various sensors such as a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72 and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on are connected. The signal from the sensor is output to the MPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure processing described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit An external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), etc. There is.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10, but the board is provided with an integrated MPU181, an image controller 186, various memories, and the like, and is displayed and controlled after receiving a signal from the main control device 101. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that controls and manages the game. The various display units 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Further, in the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 for storing various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured by a NAND flash memory which can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area and is an inexpensive memory. .. As a result, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased, and many images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the auxiliary display unit The images displayed in can be diversified and complicated. The NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). Therefore, in the display control device 81, the read speed is slow. Has been invented to display an image at a desired time without any problem even if the image data is used as a storage means for image data. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The MPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. It has a built-in RAM 106 for securing and a free run counter 107 for generating random numbers. Further, although not shown, the MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit required for the slot machine 10, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. It is built-in.

The free run counter 107 is a counter configured by hardware that generates and updates random numbers from 0 to 65535 in a short cycle. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free run counter 107 by a hard circuit, and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. Further, the value of the free run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used to draw a winning mode (combination) of the game started by the operation of the start lever 41.

The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and a program for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 and 12 is stored in the ROM 105 as a part of the control program. Further, the ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode.

Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing a lottery table selected in the general game state when the setting state is set to “setting 1”, and FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing the number of medals inserted in 3 pieces. The three-card lottery table used when (three-card hanging) is used, (b) is the two-card hanging lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is two (two-card hanging), and (c) is The lottery table for one-card medals used when the number of inserted medals is one (one-card hang) is shown.

An index value IV is set in each lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning mode of winning, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, IV = 1 is associated with a BB prize as a winning mode, IV = 2 is associated with a watermelon prize, IV = 3 is associated with a bell prize, and IV = 4. Is associated with a cherry bell winning, IV = 5 is associated with a 7 bell winning, and IV = 6 is associated with a replay winning.

Further, in the three-sheet lottery table, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV = 256 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 2 (watermelon prize). 8192 is associated, PV = 12850 is associated with IV = 3 (bell winning), PV = 0 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry bell winning), IV = 5 (7 bell winning) ) Is associated with PV = 0, and IV = 6 (replay winning) is associated with PV = 8980.

Here, the lottery method of the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the point value PV value associated with IV = 1 (BB prize) (FIG. 9A). In the lottery table shown in (1), 256) is added to the value of the latched random number and used as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). Then, when the determination value DV is larger than 65535, the BB prize is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery ends. That is, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the BB prize is determined as a winning combination when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 655280 to 65535. .. Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the value of the index value IV after the advance is added to the determination value DV. Then, the determination value DV is updated (see S304 in FIG. 14). Then, when the determined determination value DV after the update is a value larger than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV after the advance is determined as a winning combination, and the lottery is completed, and when it is 65535 or less, Further, the index value IV is incremented by one to update the determination value DV (addition of the point value PV corresponding to the IV after the advance) and the determination of the updated determination value DV (whether or not the determination value DV is larger than 65535). ) Is repeated until the winning combination is determined or the determination combination disappears (until the IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

As a result, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the watermelon prize is determined as a winning combination when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 57808 to 655279. When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the replay winning combination is determined as the winning combination. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/8 for the watermelon winning, about 1 / 5.1 for the bell winning, and about 1 / for the replay winning. It will be set to 1/3.

In the three-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (cherry bell winning) and IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change between before and after the update. Then, when the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 and IV = 5 is added to the determination value DV, it is when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, so when IV = 4 and IV = 5. Even if the determination value after the update is determined, it is not determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (cherry bell prize) and IV = 5 (7 bell prize) to 0, the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize will not be selected as winners. It has become.

In the two-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon prize). , IV = 3 (bell winning) is associated with PV = 1, IV = 4 (cherry bell winning) is associated with PV = 36400, and IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is associated with PV. = 0 is associated, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the two-card lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, the BB prize is determined as a winning combination when the value of the latched random number is 65535, and the latched random number is used. When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is 65533, the bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the value of the latched random number is in the range of 29133 to 65532. At one point, the cherry bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 20153 to 29132, the replay winning combination is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probabilities of each winning mode are set to 1/65536 for each of the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, and about 1 / 1.8 for the cherry bell winning. It will be set, and the replay prize will be set to about 1/7.3. Since the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0, as described above, the 7 bell winning is not set as a winning combination.

Further, in the one-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 1 corresponds to IV = 2 (watermelon prize). Attached, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 3 (bell winning), PV = 10880 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry bell winning), and IV = 5 (7 bell winning). PV = 10880 is associated with this, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the one-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, the BB winning combination is determined as a winning combination when the value of the latched random number is 65535, and the latched random number is used. When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is 65533, the bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the value of the latched random number is in the range of 54653 to 65532. At one point, the cherry bell winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and when the latched random number value is in the range of 43737 to 54652, the 7 bell winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and the latched random number value is 34793 to 43772. When it is in the range, the replay prize is judged as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for each of the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning. It will be set to 1 / 1, and the replay winning will be set to about 1 / 7.3.

In the lottery table storage area 105a, a lottery table for one-sheet hanging, a lottery table for two-sheet hanging, and a lottery table for three-sheet hanging for general game states are stored for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6". There is. Further, a lottery table in the bonus state, which is used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, is prepared for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Then, a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode (combination) is set according to the setting state and the game state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (the number of bets). That is, in the general game state, when the number of bets is 3, a lottery table for playing 3 cards is set corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10, and when the number of bets is 2, the slot machine 10 A two-card lottery table corresponding to the set state is set, and when the number of bets is one, a one-card lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. When the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a lottery table in the bonus state corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, a lottery of the winning mode is performed using the set lottery table.

As the lottery table used when the game state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, different lottery tables are not provided according to the number of bets (1 to 3), but this is a bonus in the present embodiment. This is because the game is played by limiting the number of bets to three when the player is in the state. Therefore, in the case of the bonus state, the corresponding lottery table in the bonus state is simply set according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”) of the slot machine 10.

In the slot machine 10, when the game is in a general gaming state, the three-card lottery table shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c), the two-card lottery table, and the one-card lottery table are set according to the number of bets. By switching the game, the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals can be set sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. .. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have the player insert three medals and play one game while expecting the player to pay out a large number of medals by establishing the BB prize. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of slot machines in the hall.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with three medals paid out can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability can be set high. Therefore, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player is expected to pay out three medals by winning the Cherry Bell prize, and the remaining one or two medals are left in the player's hand. It is possible to insert one medal to play one game. As a result, if three medals are paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the establishment of the BB prize. , The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is different, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell prize with two medals paid out can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability can be set high. If one medal remains in the player's hand, the player is expected to pay out two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, and the player is allowed to insert the remaining one medal. You can play one game. As a result, if two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the cherry-bell prize to be established in which three more medals are paid out. , You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game, and even if you miss it, you can use up the medals. Therefore, while giving the player more enjoyment of the game, it is possible to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

In this way, the slot machine 10 allows the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

Further, by using the one-card lottery table and the two-card lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 105a, the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets can be set to a value of less than 100% and as close to 100% as possible in both cases of 1-card and 2-card. it can. Therefore, even if the game is played with one or two medals, the medals are hardly reduced. Therefore, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player has one remaining in the hand. Alternatively, it is possible to make sure that the player wants to play the game using two medals, and the possibility that the player finishes the game by leaving the medals can be further reduced. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two medals, the number of medals will decrease. Therefore, if the player repeats the game with one or two medals, the number of medals will increase. Can be prevented from aiming at. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, the player can be directed to play the game with three medals having a high probability of winning the BB prize.

In addition, by switching and using each lottery table according to the number of bets, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells, and the game is played with three. If it is done, it can be treated as a miss without establishing a cherry bell prize, so pay attention to the player as the cherry bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to 1 and 2 cards. Can be made to. Similarly, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one 7-bell prize, and when the game is played with two or three cards, the 7-bell prize is not established. Since it is treated as an outlier, the player can be noticed that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol is stopped at the stop symbol of the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning, the player can be greatly delighted.

In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, although the winning probability is extremely low, it can be set so that the BB prize is established, so one or two cards can be played. Even when the game is played in, the player can have a sense of expectation that the BB prize will be established.

Further, in this slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon prize or a bell prize is lowered when the game is played with one or two cards, while the probability of winning a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize is set high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning is a special small role winning with one or two slots, and one or two slots. When the game is played by hanging, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established.

In this embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0 in the two-card lottery table, and IV = 4 (cherry bell winning) in the three-card lottery table. ) And IV = 5 (7 bell winning), by setting the point value PV to 0, the lottery of those winning modes is performed, but the winning mode is not won, but the winning mode is won. By not setting the index value IV to be, and not drawing lots for those winning modes, the winning mode may not be won.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and a sliding table used for stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the slide table storage area 106b for storing the above, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the bonus state, and the like, at least a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see S103 in FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 81. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the portion described in the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65, and displays an image with a microcomputer centered on the MPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. An image controller 188 that draws and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, a character ROM 187 that stores image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are mounted.

An input / output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 are connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus, and a signal latch circuit 182 that latches control signals such as commands transmitted from the main control device 101, and a predetermined signal latch circuit 182. A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave of frequency, a program ROM 184 that stores fixed value data for driving various control programs executed by the MPU 181 and an upper lamp 63, etc., and a program ROM 184 stored in the program ROM 184. A work RAM 185 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program is connected. A one-chip microcomputer in which the above-mentioned program ROM 184, work RAM 185, signal latch circuit 182, clock circuit 183, and the like are built in the MPU may be used.

Further, the power supply device 91, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the MPU 181 via the input / output port 186. The power supply device 91 is configured to input a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 101, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 via the input / output port 186. .. Hereinafter, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect unit.

The work RAM 185 is provided with at least a reception command storage area 185a and a bet number storage area 185b. The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main control device 101. When the display control device 81 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 latches the received command by the signal latch circuit 182 and generates a command interrupt signal toward the MPU 181. The MPU 181 executes a command interrupt process (not shown) triggered by the generation of a command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the reception command storage area 185a. The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a ring buffer of the FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the command received from the main control device 101 is sent to the received command storage area 185a by the main process executed by the MPU 181. If they are stored, the commands are read in the order in which they are stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 19, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 20, error command processing shown in FIG. 21, etc. ) Is executed.

The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information regarding the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and the start lever 41 is operated by the player, the number of inserted medals (number of bets) by the normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. A start command including information about the above is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control unit 101 to the display control unit 81 by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control unit 101 (see S209 in FIG. 13). See S110 in FIG. 12). Upon receiving this start command, the display control device 81 grasps that the start lever 41 has been operated to generate the game start command, executes the start command process (see FIG. 19), and sends the start command to the start command. Information on the number of bets included is extracted and the information is stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 19). In the bet number storage area 185b, the information on the number of bets included in the start command may be stored as it is, or the information on the number of bets may be stored in a format different from the information on the number of bets included in the start command. It may be stored.

The display control device 81 grasps the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, and causes the auxiliary production unit to execute the medals based on the number of bets. Control the production mode. For example, when it is determined that the game has started with the number of bets being 3, based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 has various commands received from the main control device 101. The production mode is selected based on the game state of the slot machine 10 determined by the above and the result of the lottery (judgment of winning / failing of the winning mode) performed based on the start command, and the auxiliary production unit is made to execute various effects (FIG. 20). See S902).

As an effect corresponding to the number of bets, for example, as a normal effect, a "normal effect" in which a character performing a predetermined operation is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a "challenge to win a BB prize!" On the auxiliary display unit 65. Is displayed to urge the player to align the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, "BB winning challenge production" is displayed, and the message "BB winning is won!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display 65, and the upper lamp is displayed. Along with the lighting of 63 and the audio output from the speaker 64, a random number counter (shown) provided in the display control device 81 includes a "BB winning notification effect" for notifying that the BB winning mode has been set as a winning combination. The slot machine 10 is grasped by the state command described later received from the main control device 101 as a result of the lottery (win / fail determination of the winning combination) grasped by the value of The production mode to be executed by the auxiliary production unit is determined from among those productions according to the game state of the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game has started with the number of bets being one or two, the auxiliary production unit executes the game based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command by the main control device 101. Select the production mode to be performed. For example, the number of bets is determined to be one, and the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode, or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or which winning mode is selected. If it is determined that the user has not won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the message "Challenge the cherry bell 7 bell!" And outputs a dedicated voice from the speaker 64. The auxiliary production unit is controlled so as to execute the "cherry bell winning / 7 bell winning challenge effect" that lights the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner (see S911 in FIG. 20). In addition, it is determined that the number of bets is 2, and the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or neither winning mode is won. If it is determined that the display control device 81 displays the message "Challenge the cherry bell!" On the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64 outputs a dedicated voice, and the upper lamp 63 is set in a dedicated mode. The auxiliary production unit is controlled so as to execute the “cherry bell winning challenge effect” to be turned on (see S910 in FIG. 20).

If the game is played with one medal, the expectation that three or two medals will be paid out by the establishment of one cherry bell winning or seven bell winning mode by "cherry bell winning, seven bell winning challenge production". Can be strongly held by the player. In addition, when the game is played with two medals, the "cherry bell winning challenge production" can give the player a strong sense of expectation that three medals will be paid out when the cherry bell winning mode is established. .. Therefore, since the player can play the game by playing one or two medals while having fun, the player can be strongly reminded that he wants to play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

The "cherry bell winning / 7 bell winning challenge effect" and the "cherry bell winning challenge effect" may be an effect mode performed in at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. .. In addition to these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25, and for example, in the case of one piece, the lamp is lit in red, and in the case of two pieces, the lamp is lit in blue. May be configured to be executed.

If it is determined that the number of bets is one or two, and the lottery result command received from the main control device 101 determines that the BB winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 will be BB. As an effect of notifying the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a "BB winning notification effect" for displaying the message "BB winning winning!" Is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (see S904 in FIG. 20). ), If it is determined that the watermelon winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 notifies the player that the watermelon winning mode has been set as the winning combination, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is informed that the watermelon winning mode has been won. When the "watermelon winning notification effect" for displaying the message "Winning!" Is executed (see S906 in FIG. 20) and it is determined that the bell winning mode is won, the display control device 81 wins the bell winning mode. As an effect of notifying the player that the combination has been set, a "bell prize announcement effect" is executed in which the message "Bell prize winning!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (see S908 of FIG. 20).

Here, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, that is, when the number of bets is one or two, the lottery table shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (c) shows BB. While the winning probabilities of the winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are kept extremely low, the winning probabilities of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode are set high, so that the player can use the BB winning mode. There is a high possibility that the game will be played with the expectation that the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode will be established, and conversely, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode will be established. In addition, in this slot machine 10, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode are effective in the corresponding stop symbol without missing even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing once they are won as winning combinations. Since it is configured to stop on the line, the player who started the game with one or two slots is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. There is a high possibility that the stop switches 42 to 44 will be operated without looking at the design.

Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, even if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, there is a risk that the establishment of the BB winning mode and the like may be missed. In addition, the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the games until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the effective line), so that the player can BB. If the game ends without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has assigned the winning of the BB winning mode As a result, there is a risk of loss.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when a game is played with one or two cards, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won in the game, the slot machine 10 is used. Winning is announced by the display of the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, the notification is made while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode, or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the effective line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, if the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, the player may continue the game until the BB winning mode is established by receiving a new medal loan even if the game is missed. it can.

The above notification may be made by lighting the upper lamp 63 or outputting voice from the speaker 64, and may be performed by two or more types of display of the auxiliary display unit 65, lighting of the upper lamp 63, and voice output from the speaker 64. It may be done by a combination. Further, a lamp dedicated to notification may be provided on the game panel 25, and a notification effect corresponding to each winning combination may be performed depending on the lighting color of the lamp.

As described above, the character ROM 187 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 and uses the image data stored in the character ROM 187 as a resident video RAM 189 connected to the image controller 188 or for normal use. It can be transferred to the video RAM 190.

The character ROM 187 is composed of a NAND flash memory 187a. Since the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, the character ROM 187 can be easily increased in capacity. For example, in this slot machine, by using a NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images are stored as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 187a, a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Therefore, the character ROM 187 is provided with a known arbitration circuit 187b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) that performs data address conversion so that data can be read and written to and from the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding defective data blocks. It is provided. Since the arbitration circuit 187b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a inside the character ROM 187 and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 181 has a different defect in each NAND flash memory 187a. The character ROM 187 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 187.

The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Then, based on the instruction from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data (drawing image data) corresponding to the drawn image is output to the auxiliary display unit via the input / output port at a predetermined timing. By transferring to 65, the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188, and image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read from the character ROM 187 by the MPU 181 in advance before drawing and is resident. It is transferred to the video RAM 189 for use or the video RAM 190 for normal use. At this time, whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (further, to which address to store) depends on the content of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 184 by the MPU181. To decide.

When the image controller 188 draws an image, the image data of the character ROM 187 is not used, and the image drawing process is executed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed, the image controller 188 uses the image data previously stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187 to obtain images. Since the drawing is performed, the drawing of the image can be executed immediately without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187. Therefore, the desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a desired time.

The MPU 181 uses the program ROM 184 to determine whether the image data required for the image controller 188 to draw an image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and at what address). Storage destination of image data (resident video RAM 189 and normal video) required when instructing the image controller 188 to draw an image by making a judgment according to the content of the image based on the program or table stored in Which of the RAM 190 it is stored in and which address it is stored in) is also indicated. The image controller 188 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 based on the instruction from the MPU 181. As a result, the image controller 188 does not need to determine the storage destination in which the necessary image data is stored, so that the image controller 188 can concentrate on drawing the image.

When the image controller 188 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 181, the storage destination of the image data required for drawing (resident video RAM 189 and normal video RAM 190) is selected according to the type of image required for drawing. It may be determined which is stored and at which address). In this case, when image data is stored from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 by the MPU 181, the image controller 188 displays the type of image (or the corresponding image) by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the data is stored and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the type (or corresponding) of the image is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188. The address of the character ROM 187 in which the image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, the image controller 188 may determine the storage destination of the image data required for the image based on the information stored in the RAM. The processing load of the MPU 181 can be reduced by determining the storage destination of the image data by the image controller 188.

The resident video RAM 189 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) having one input / output port (hereinafter, referred to as "1 port type"), and the image data transferred from the character ROM 187 is overwritten during power-on. It is used to keep it held without any problems. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 is resident in the resident video RAM 189. In the resident video RAM 189, among the images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and the main control device 101 Alternatively, among the images whose display is determined by the display control device 81, the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately is transferred from the character ROM 187 and is resident.

On the other hand, the normal video RAM 190 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). When the image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data read from the character ROM 187 in advance is read in the normal video RAM 190. This is for temporarily storing. Further, the image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 188 is also stored in the drawn image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190, and the image controller 188 is adjusted to the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. By transmitting the drawn image data stored in the drawn image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display unit 65, the image corresponding to the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The resident video RAM 189 is provided with a main image area 189a, a background image area 189b, a character symbol area 189c, a notification effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e when the power is turned on.

The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the display control device 81 is performing the power-on initialization process. The main image at the time of power-on is a message image for notifying the player, etc. that the initialization process accompanying the power-on is being performed, and a message such as "Power-on! Please wait for a while". Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 181 and first corresponds to the main image when the power is turned on from the character ROM 181. The data is read out and transferred to the main image area 189a when the power of the resident video RAM 189 is turned on via the buffer RAM 188a described later provided in the image controller 188 (see S702 and S703 in FIG. 17). Then, when the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S70 in FIG. 17). As a result, in the image controller 188, the main image at power-on is drawn using the image data stored in the main image area 189a at power-on, and the drawn main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. .. Then, the main image at power-on is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

Here, in the initialization process of the display control device 81, other image data (image data other than the main image at power-on) to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. Processing is included (see S707-S710 in FIG. 17). That is, since all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189 after the initialization process is completed. Image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to the display of some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be maintained high. it can.

Further, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 immediately after the power is supplied, and power is supplied without delay after the transfer is completed. After the main image of the power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the main image of the power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. After being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character RO187 to the resident video RAM 189. Continue to be done.

In this slot machine 10, since the character ROM 187 uses the NAND flash memory 187a, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187 due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer to the video RAM 189, but after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is assisted. After being displayed on the display unit 65, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, so that the remaining resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. During this period, the player and the person involved in the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 may transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored in the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189, it is resident in the resident video RAM 189 when a momentary power failure occurs. If the data remains, the main image at power-on can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data resident in the main image area 189a at power-on when the power is restored.

The background image area 189b and the character symbol area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to the background image and the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, respectively.

When the display control device 81 determines that the gaming state of the slot machine 10 shifts to a different gaming state (for example, from the normal state to the bonus state) based on the command received from the main control device 101, the background image or the character symbol is displayed. It is configured to change the background image and the character symbol when changing or performing various other effects, and it is required that the background image and the character symbol change immediately according to the content of the reception command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, in the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on, the background image and the image data corresponding to the character symbol are obtained from the character ROM 187 and the resident video RAM 189, respectively. It is configured to be transferred in advance to the background image area 189b and the character symbol area 189c of the above via a buffer RAM 188a described later provided in the image controller 188 (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). Then, when the display control device 81 changes the background image or the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, but the resident video RAM 189. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the background image area 189b and the character symbol area 189c, the image controller 188 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, so that the background image and the character pattern can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187.

In the background image area 189b, the image data corresponding to all the background images may be resident, or the image data corresponding to some background images may be resident. Further, when the image data corresponding to a part of the background image is resident, at least the data corresponding to the background image to be displayed immediately in response to the reception command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when a reception command is received from the main control device 101 and the background image is changed immediately, the image data corresponding to the changed background image is always resident in the background image area 189b. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, when the background image is scrolled and displayed with the passage of time, the image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range may be resident in the background image area 189b, or within a predetermined time from the time when the background image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in may be resident in the background image area 189b. Further, for a predetermined background image such as a background image displayed after the power is turned on, image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range is resident in the background image area 189b, and for another background image, a predetermined time from the time when the background image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in the image may be resident in the background image area 189b. As a result, at least the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the background image is changed is resident in the background image area 189b, so that when changing to a background image that is scrolled with the passage of time. Even if there is, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the background image area 189b and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, when changing to a scrolled background image, it is more preferable that the display always starts from a fixed initial position as the position of the background image displayed at the time of change. .. As a result, the image data to be resident in the background image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the amount of the data can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, when the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the background image is changed is resident in the background image area 189b, the image data resident in the background image area 189b by the image controller 188 is used. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range is read from the character ROM 187 by the MPU 181 and transferred to the normal video RAM 190. It may be.

As a result, while the background image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the background image data resident in the background image area 189, the scroll range not resident in the background image area 189 is supported. Since the background image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, when displaying the background image in the scroll range that is not resident in the background image area 189, the background image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used. Then, the image controller can immediately draw an image and display it on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, at the time of shifting from the display of the background image in the scroll range resident in the background image area 189b to the display of the background image in the scroll range not resident in the background image area 189b, the background image is read out again from the character ROM 187. Since it is not necessary, even when a NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, the background image can be smoothly transferred.

On the other hand, also in the character symbol area 189c, the data corresponding to all the character symbols may be resident, or the data corresponding to some character symbols may be resident. Further, when the data corresponding to a part of the character symbols is resident, at least the data corresponding to the character symbols to be displayed immediately in response to the reception command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when a reception command is received from the main control device 101 and the character symbol is changed immediately, the image data corresponding to the changed character symbol is always resident in the character symbol area 189c. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the error message image area 189e is when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

For example, when a game is played with one or two bets and one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination as a result of the lottery, the display control device 81 sets the display control device 81. According to the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to control so that the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning announcement effect, and the bell winning announcement effect are performed (see S903 to S908 in FIG. 20). In this case, the display control device 81 grasps the winning combination by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, and various notification effects are performed according to the grasped winning combination. It needs to be done before the stop buttons 42-44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the lottery of the winning combination is performed after the start lever 41 is operated by the player by the main control device 101, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. In an extremely short period of time, the main control device 101 draws a combination, and the lottery result is notified from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by the lottery result command, and then the display control is performed. The corresponding notification effect must be performed by the means 81, but in the slot machine 10, the image data corresponding to each of the BB prize notification effect, the watermelon prize announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect is provided in the notification effect image area 189d. Is resident in advance, so that the display control device 81 can perform the BB prize notification effect, the watermelon prize announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect from the character ROM 187 based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. By reading the image data resident in advance in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189 instead of newly reading the corresponding image data, each notification effect image can be drawn by the image controller 188. It has become. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data sequentially from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, the stop button is displayed after receiving the lottery result command for each notification effect image. 42 to 44 can be displayed before they can be operated by the player.

Further, in the slot machine 10, the inserted medals are inserted into the inserted medal sensor device based on the detection results of the inserted medal detection device (first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and second inserted medal detection sensor 45b) by the main control device 101. If it is determined that the medal is clogged or the medal is illegally pulled out during the passage of the above, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the sensor error by an error command as described above. Further, when the main control device 101 detects the occurrence of another error, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by the error command. Then, when the display control device 81 receives an error command, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the slot machine 10, the error message image area 189e is used. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance, the display control device 81 newly adds the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. By reading the image data resident in the error message image image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189 in advance, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the successive error messages from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed in.

The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. The buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187 (for example, 132). It is composed of SRAM (Static RAM) having (kilobytes), and is configured to be directly accessible from MPU181.

When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads one block of data from the character ROM 187 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 188a, and then stores the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in anticipation of when the RAM 190 is not in use.

If the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without providing the buffer RAM 188, the reading speed of the character ROM 187 is slow because it is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a. Therefore, while the image data of the desired size is transferred, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 composed of the 1-port type DRAM occupies one port of the image data transfer from the character ROM 187, which is long. Time and other data access will not be possible. As a result, during that time, the image controller 188 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to draw the image, or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. The image display of the auxiliary display unit 65 may be delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied for image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 in the image controller 188 is limited, and the control may be complicated.

On the other hand, since the slot machine 10 provides the image controller 188 with a buffer RAM 188a configured by a SRAM capable of operating at high speed, the image data read from the character ROM 187 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a. After storing, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

The image display on the auxiliary display unit 65 is periodically performed at regular time intervals (for example, every 30 milliseconds), and the image controller 188 displays the image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing of displaying the image. The drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the above. Therefore, in accessing the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, it is necessary to prioritize the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing and reading of the drawn image data.

In the slot machine 10, the resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing (that is, in use) the resident video RAM 189 and the image controller 188 are for normal use. The image controller 188 is provided with a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (ie, in use). All of these access flags are set to be on when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and off when the image controller 188 is not accessing the video RAM. When transferring image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 confirms the contents of the access flags corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads out the image data necessary for drawing. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are being used by the image controller 188 for writing or reading the drawn image data. Then, when the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are unused, the image data is controlled to be transferred. As a result, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing or reading of the drawn image data.

Here, the display timing of the image in the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing a scanning area of a screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 and a display area in which an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, an area larger than the display area where the image is actually displayed is set as the scanning area, and when the image is displayed on the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the scanning area is covered by the scanning area. Scanning is performed while driving each pixel constituting the screen (so-called raster scan) from left to right and from top to bottom toward the screen. At this time, since the drawn image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area (so-called blank period) is , The image controller 188 does not transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the auxiliary display unit 65, it is not possible to draw the image using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. Therefore, the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read out and transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, since there is always a period during which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are unused during this blank period, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is performed. By utilizing the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 that occurs during this blank period, this can be reliably performed.

In the MPU 181, as a method of confirming whether or not the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189, or an image controller The signal transmitted / received between the 188 and the normal video RAM 190 may be monitored by the MPU 181, and it may be confirmed from the state of the signal whether the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is in use. Further, when the image controller 188 starts to access the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 or terminates the access, the image controller 188 notifies the MPU 181 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 181 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use.

Further, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display unit 65, whether or not the blank period is in effect is determined by the MPU 181 confirming the driving state of the image controller 188 or by notifying the image controller 188. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 189 and 190 are unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display unit 65 of the image controller 188 is confirmed to determine whether or not the image controller is in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated upon input. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 12 to 17.

First, the timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. In the MPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, a timer interrupt is generated every 1.49 msec, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed by the MPU 102 in response to the timer interrupt.

In this timer interrupt process, first, register save processing is performed (S101). In this register save process, the values of all the registers in the MPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set (S102), and if the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), the power failure processing is executed (S103).

Here, the outline of the power failure processing executed in S103 will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power supply is completely cut off, or to prevent abnormal output from output devices such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the process proceeds to S104. Moreover, if the output of the power failure signal is continuously performed, the infinite loop is entered as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes after S104 are performed. That is, in the process of S104, the watchdog timer clear process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, an interrupt end declaration process is performed on the MPU 102 itself so that the next timer interrupt can be set (S105), and stepping, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A stepping motor control process for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read. At the same time, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the reading result is normal is performed (S107).

In this sensor monitoring process, if an error exists in the reading result of each sensor, for example, from the detection results of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, the inserted medals may be jammed or pulled out. When the fraud is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred, and the occurrence of the sensor error is notified from the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). An error command including information is transmitted to the display control device 81.

In the subsequent processing of S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed (S108), and the number of bets to bet and the result of counting the number of payouts are output to the external centralized terminal board 121. In / out counter processing is performed (S109).

Next, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). After that, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed (S111), and then the segment set in the segment data setting process is performed (S111). Data is supplied to each display unit 60 to 62 to perform segment data display processing for displaying corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like (S112).

Then, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device is performed from the input / output port 104 (S113), and the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous process of S101 are stored in the MPU 102. It returns to the corresponding register of (S114). After that, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing.

The normal process is a process that performs main control related to the game. When the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is first performed (S201), and then the game is enabled. Pre-start processing for this is performed (S202). In this pre-start processing, the display control device 81 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. Then, when the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management processing shown in S203 to S213 is performed.

As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game and each winning flag indicating the winning of each winning excluding the BB winning) are used. After clearing, in the subsequent processing of S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not the replay winning is established in the previous game, and if the replay winning is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number. Is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if the replay prize is established in the previous game, the player can perform this game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

On the other hand, if none of the replay prizes is established, a sensor for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 in FIG. 12). An abnormality confirmation process is performed, and if an error occurs, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do. Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process is performed and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process of S204 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number (S205), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number (S205: No), S204. Returning to the start waiting process of, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state of the slot machine 10.

That is, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state, the specified number is set to 1 to 3, and when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the specified number is set to 3. As a result, in the general game state, the game can be started not only with three bets but also with one or two bets. Then, when the game is started with the number of bets of 1 or 2 (1 or 2), the above-mentioned 1-card lottery table or 2 in the lottery process (see S210) described later. Since the lottery table is set at the time of hanging and the lottery of the winning mode (role) is performed, there is a high probability that the number of medals to be paid out is 3 when the game is played with 1 or 2 medals. It is possible to win a prize or win a 7-bell prize in which the number of medals paid out is two. Then, if three medals are paid out due to the establishment of the Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the establishment of the BB prize. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. In addition, if two medals are paid out due to the establishment of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the cherry-bell prize to be paid out with three more medals. You can enjoy another game. Then, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three medals paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Can be enjoyed. Further, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is different, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player. In this way, even if the number of bets is one or two in the general game state, the player can be changed by using the one-card lottery table and the two-card lottery table set in the present embodiment. You can give the fun of the game, and you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

On the other hand, by setting the specified number of bets to 3 when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the watermelon with a large number of medals paid out while allowing the player to insert 3 medals in the bonus state. By increasing the winning probability of winning or bell winning and setting the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game high, the total number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state can be achieved to 250 in a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive many medals in a short time, and on the other hand, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased on the hall side.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number as a result of the processing of S205 (S205: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). Then, when the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated while the slot machine 10 is betting a specified number of medals. Therefore, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance (S207). In the subsequent processing of 208, the valid line setting process for setting the valid line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the right-down line L4, and the right-up line L5 are set as effective lines.

Then, the start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know that the start command has occurred. In this normal processing, information regarding the number of bets (number of inserted medals) accepted in the processing of S205 is included in this start command and set. Then, the start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms. The above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the process of S110 (see). As a result, the display control device 81 grasps that the start command of the game has been generated by receiving the start command, and also grasps the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted by the player for the game. It is possible to make each auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) execute various effects according to the number of bets.

After that, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are executed in order, and the process returns to the process of S203. Then, in the power failure processing (S103) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), the processes S203 to S213 are repeatedly executed until the power is cut off by the power switch 71 or an infinite loop is entered due to the power failure.

Next, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the lottery process.

In the lottery process, first, a random number used when performing a lottery of a winning mode (combination) is acquired (S301). In the slot machine 10, as described above, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 at that time, and the latched free run is performed. By reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106, the value of the random number used for the lottery is acquired.

After acquiring the random numbers by the process of S301, the lottery table setting process for setting the lottery table for performing the lottery of the winning mode is performed (S302). Here, the details of the lottery table setting process of S302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a lottery table setting process executed in the MPU 102 of the main control device 101. In this lottery table setting process, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined, and further, the lottery table storage area 105a is determined according to the number of medals inserted (number of bets) and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from a plurality of lottery tables stored in.

In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S401), and as a result, if it is not a bonus state (S401: No), the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a general game. Since it is in the state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (number of bets) is 3 (3 medals) (S402). If the number of bets is three (S402: Yes), the six three-card lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that the slot machine 10 can take. Of these, the lottery table for hanging three cards corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is completed, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and the game is started with the number of bets of three, a three-card lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the processing of S402 (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 (2 bets) (S404). If the number of bets is two (S404: Yes), the six two-card lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that the slot machine 10 can take. Of these, the lottery table for hanging two cards corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is completed, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and the game is started with the number of bets of two, a two-card lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is not two as a result of the processing of S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the number of bets is one (one bet), so that the slot machine 10 can take " Of the six single-card lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", set the single-card lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state. (S406), the lottery table setting process is completed, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state and the game is started with the number of bets of one card, a lottery table for playing one card corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set. ..

On the other hand, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the slot machine 10 is provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that can be taken. Of the six bonus state lottery tables, the bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S407), the lottery table setting process is completed, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, the bonus lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set.

As described above, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table is stored in the lottery table storage area 105a according to the current gaming state of the slot machine 10, the number of medals inserted (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from the plurality of lottery tables created.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process will be continued. After the lottery table setting process of S302 is completed, the index value IV is set to 1 (S303), and the determination value DV used when performing the lottery (win / fail determination) of the winning mode is set (S304). In such a judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV of 1 is added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, a lottery of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. Then, when it exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 1, in the processing of S306, the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when IV = 2, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In this case, in the processing of S306, the watermelon winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 3, in the processing of S306, the bell winning winning flag is set as the winning flag. When the storage area 106a is set and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 4, the cherry bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the processing of S306, and the determination is made when IV = 5. When the value DV exceeds 65535, the 7-bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the processing of S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 6, in the processing of S306, the 7-bell winning winning flag is set. The replay winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the set winning flag is any of the watermelon winning flag, the bell winning flag, the cherry bell winning flag, the 7 bell winning flag, and the replay winning flag, this winning flag is set. It is reset after the end of the game (see S203 of the normal process shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the set winning flag is the BB winning winning flag, this BB winning winning flag is reset on condition that the BB winning is established. That is, the BB winning winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. For example, after the BB winning winning flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned in the stop symbol of the BB winning mode, that is, if the BB winning is not established, the BB winning winning flag is not reset and is carried over to the next game. Is done.

In the processing of S306 in the state where the BB winning winning flag is carried over, the BB winning winning flag is not set if the current index value IV is 1, and the index value if the current index value IV is 2 to 6. Set the winning flag corresponding to IV. That is, in the game in which the BB winning winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set when the winning mode other than the BB winning is won, while the corresponding BB winning winning flag is set when the BB winning is won. Do not set.

If it is determined in the process of S305 that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV has been deviated. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination combination to be drawn (win / fail determination) ( S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination combination to be determined as to whether or not it is correct (S308: Yes), the process returns to the process of S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning mode is successful is continued. At this time, in the processing of S304, a new judgment value DV is added by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination. Then, in the process of S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning mode is performed based on the determination value DV.

Here, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state by the lottery table setting process of S302, the three-card lottery table for the general gaming state, the two-card lottery table, and the one-card lottery Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the number of bets, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the winning probability of BB winning when the game is played by inserting three medals is 1. The lottery of the winning mode is performed after the game is set sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have the player insert three medals and play one game while expecting the player to pay out a large number of medals by establishing the BB prize. Therefore, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with three medals paid out is set as a winning combination candidate and the winning probability is set high, and then the winning mode is set. Since a lottery is held, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, if the cherry bell prize is established, three medals can be paid out with a high probability of winning the BB prize. While expecting a person, one or two medals remaining at hand can be inserted to play one game. Furthermore, when the game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell prize with two medals paid out is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high, and then the lottery of the winning mode is performed. Since it is done, if one medal remains in the player's hand, if the 7 bell prize is established, the player is expected to get two medals to aim for the cherry bell prize again. It is possible to play one game by inserting one remaining medal. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end without leaving any extra medals.

In addition, when a lottery table for one-sheet hanging or a lottery table for two-sheet hanging is set and a lottery in a winning mode is performed, either one-sheet hanging or two-sheet hanging In this case as well, the lottery of the winning mode can be performed by setting the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets to a value less than 100% and as close to 100% as possible. Therefore, even if the game is played with one or two medals, the medals are hardly reduced. Therefore, if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one or two medals are used. You can make sure that you want to play the game. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two medals, the number of medals will decrease, so the player should not aim to increase the number of medals by repeating the game with one or two medals. If there are three or more medals, the player can be urged to play the game with three medals with a high probability of winning a BB prize.

Further, by switching each lottery table according to the number of bets and performing the lottery in the winning mode, as described above with reference to FIGS. 7 and 9, the cherry bell winning is one or two. It is a winning mode that is established only when the game is played, and if the game is played with three cards, it can be treated as a miss without establishing the cherry bell winning, so one cherry bell winning is given. It is possible to draw attention to the player as it is a special small winning combination dedicated to hanging and double-hanging. Similarly, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one 7-bell prize, and when the game is played with two or three cards, the 7-bell prize is not established. Since it is treated as an outlier, the player can be noticed that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol is stopped at the stop symbol of the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning, the player can be greatly delighted.

In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, although the winning probability is extremely low, the lottery of the winning mode can be performed by setting so that the BB winning is established. When the game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the BB prize will be established.

In addition, while lowering the winning probability of watermelon winning or bell winning when the game is played with one or two playing, the winning probability of cherry bell winning or 7 bell winning is set high, and the lottery of the winning mode is set. It is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning is a special small role winning with one or two hangs, and one hang or one hang or two. When the game is played with two cards, the player can have a sense of expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established.

After setting the winning flag in the process of S306, or when it is determined in the process of S308 that there is no determination combination to be drawn (S308: No), it means that the lottery of the winning mode is completed. In such a case, a lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, and the winning mode corresponding to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is Generate a lottery result command to include information suggesting that you are a winner. Therefore, in addition to the winning flag set by the lottery of this game, if the BB winning winning flag is carried over from the past game and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a, the BB winning mode is also the winning combination. This is suggested by the lottery result command. Further, when the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the lottery result command suggests that there is no winning combination and the winning flag is out.

Like the start command, the lottery result command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in normal processing, and is executed every 1.49 ms. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of the interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, to suggest a winning combination.

In the present embodiment, the lottery result command is set after the lottery of the winning mode and before the execution of the reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lottery result. The lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 within about 1.5 ms at the latest after the command is set (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process). Then, since the display control device 81 is configured to execute the lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) described later without delay when the lottery result command is received, after the start lever 41 is operated by the player. While the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated, the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) can be made to perform an effect suggesting a winning combination. Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the effect before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is based on the grasped winning combination. Can be adjusted.

Next, a slide table setting process for setting a slide table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process is completed. Here, the sliding table is a table in which how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid (rotated) and then stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, the sliding table is a reaching symbol (reaching symbol) that has reached the base point position (in the present embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. It is a stop data group capable of deriving the relationship between the stop symbol (number) and the stop symbol (stop symbol number) that is actually stopped at the base point position.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is stopped as it is. A stop mode, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by two symbols and then stopped, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slid by three symbols and then stopped, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the vehicle is stopped after sliding. In the sliding table, for each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is defined from the above five patterns. A number of sliding tables are prepared for each winning mode.

By setting this sliding table, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set to stop in a predetermined stop mode from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated until the specified time (190 msec) elapses. It is possible to give the player the impression that the symbol arrangement (stop roll) that stops within the visible range from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is determined by the operation of the player.

Then, in the slide table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the sliding table uniquely corresponding to the set winning flag is stored in the sliding table storage area of the RAM 106. Set to 106b. As a result, it is possible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, which has won the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, on the effective line (see FIG. 6). It is possible to prevent the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning modes that have not been won in the lottery from stopping on the valid line.

Here, as described above, the BB winning winning flag is configured so that once the flag is set, it is carried over to the next game until the BB winning is established. Therefore, the lottery performed in one game The winning flag corresponding to any of the watermelon winning, the bell winning, the cherry bell winning, the 7 bell winning, and the replay winning set as a result of the above and the carried-over BB winning winning flag are set in the winning flag storage 106a at the same time. May be. In this case, instead of the BB prize, the process is to set the slide table corresponding to the watermelon prize, bell prize, cherry bell prize, 7 bell prize or replay prize with the winning flag set in the slide table storage area 106b. Will be done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if the winning is not established, the status as a winning role will be lost. Watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning, The replay winning can be established more reliably. Then, the BB winning winning flag corresponding to the BB winning that was not established here is continuously maintained and carried over to the next game.

By the way, in the sliding table setting process of S310, when the cherry bell winning sliding table is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the cherry bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Here, the "cherry" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the cherry bell winning is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 7 symbols, and thus is described above. As described above, the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated. Further, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the cherry bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 5 or less. As described above, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M regardless of the timing at which the middle stop switch 43 is operated.

Therefore, in the cherry bell winning sliding table, no matter what symbol arrives at the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, no matter what arrival symbol number), the display window 26L is used. A stop mode in which the "cherry" symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and no matter what symbol reaches the base point position when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed (that is,). , Regardless of the arrival symbol number), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position on the display window 26M. As a result, when the cherry bell winning flag is set, the cherry bell winning sliding table sets the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell winning on the middle line L2 regardless of the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44. , The right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6) can be displayed. Therefore, the cherry bell prize can be established without so-called omission.

When the 7-bell winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Then, the "7" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the 7-bell prize is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 7 as in the "cherry" symbol. In addition, as described above, the "bell" symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the 7-bell prize is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between the symbols of the same type is 5 or less. Has been done.

Therefore, in the 7-bell winning sliding table, as in the cherry-bell winning sliding table, no matter what symbol arrives at the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, any reaching symbol number). (Even if it is), a stop mode in which the "7" symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L, and any position is set at the base point position when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed. Even if the symbol has arrived (that is, no matter what the arrival symbol number is), a stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the 7-bell winning flag is set, the 7-bell winning sliding table sets the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning on the middle line L2 regardless of the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44. , The right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6) can be displayed. Therefore, a 7-bell prize can be established without so-called omission.

In this way, when a cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize in which two medals are paid out are won in the lottery of the winning mode, the player's stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Regardless of the timing, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell prize or the stop symbol corresponding to the 7 bell prize can be displayed on any of the middle line L2, the right-down line L4, and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to win a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize without missing a so-called omission. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, the cherry bell winning or the seven bell winning can be surely established without depending on the artificial operation. In addition, the game can be played with the expectation that a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize will be established while aiming for a stop symbol of other prizes (for example, BB prize).

Next, the reel control process, which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed by the MUP 102 of the main control device 101.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106 is performed. Do. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, the MPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Is notified to the players and the like.

After the rotation start processing of S501, the stop preprocessing is performed by the processing of S502 to S505. In this pre-stop processing, it is first determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). Then, when none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed to wait until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, a stop command Is determined (S503). Then, if the stop command has not been generated (S503: No), the process returns to the process of S502 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. As a result, if the stop switch corresponding to the non-rotating reel is operated, it is ignored.

On the other hand, when the stop command is generated (S503: Yes), then whether or not the stop command this time is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch is operated when only one reel is rotating. Is determined (S504). Then, when the stop command this time is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the subsequent process of S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the process of S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command generated when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, or the second stop command generated when the two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the slide table first change process is performed, and the pre-stop process is completed. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

Here, the slide table first change process is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the slide table first change process, the slide table is changed, for example, when the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated and the first stop command is generated.

By the way, when the pre-stop processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is operated to advance the game, and the stop command is generated. In such a case, in order to stop the rotating reel, the stop control process shown in S506 to S512 is then performed.

First, in S506, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the lower stage at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the lower stage is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Subsequently, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the data of the symbol number corresponding to the reached symbol in the slide table set in the slide table storage area 106b (S507). After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped is determined in the lower row (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (S509), and if they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed. If they become equal (S509: Yes), a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (S510). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (S511), and if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped (S511: No), the slide table second change process is performed. Do (S512). Then, the process returns to the process of S502, and the pre-stop process is executed again.

Here, the slide table second change process is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second slide table change process, the slide table is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. For example, in a situation where only the bell winning flag is set, if the 12th "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the 12th "bell" on the middle reel 32M are stopped in the middle row, the left reel 32L is on the upper row. Since the 13th symbol of No. 13 and the 13th "7" symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped, the sliding table is changed in order to avoid the establishment of the BB prize.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S511 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), the payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process is terminated. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combination of winning symbols is lined up on the valid line.

In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line. To judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination matches the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination and the winning flag match, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination and the winning flag do not match, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination is completed for all the valid lines, the payout determination process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process of S212, which is a normal process (see FIG. 13), will be outlined. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that the winning of the medal to be paid out has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. Then, if the replay winning is not established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if the replay winning is established, the replay state setting process for setting the game state to the replay state is performed, and the medal payout process is completed. To do. In the start waiting process (see S204 in FIG. 13), which is executed in the normal process described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the added value is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current game state is a bonus state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the bonus state process executed in the process of S213 of the normal process (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a bonus state process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101.

First, the outline of this bonus state processing will be described. The bonus state processing is a game in which, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the game continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out (250 in this embodiment). is there. Then, when the JAC game is played 12 times in one RB state and the prize is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is terminated even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state is terminated when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number, and when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state is terminated.

Next, the details of the bonus state processing will be described. In the bonus state processing, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S601), and when it is not the bona state (S601: No), the BB determination processing shown in S602 to S605 is executed.

In this BB determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a (S602), and when the BB winning winning flag is set (S602: Yes), the reel control It is confirmed whether or not the BB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination processing executed by the processing of S513 of the processing (see FIG. 16) (S603).

When the BB prize is established in the process of S603 (S603: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB winning winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset, the setting flag stored in the state information storage area 106c is cleared, and then the BB setting flag is set to the state information storage area 106c. Set to BB game, which is a kind of bonus game. Further, 250 is set in the remaining payout number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and 250 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, the determination of whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (see S601) is determined by the presence or absence of the BB setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c.

Subsequently, in the process of S605, the RB start process is executed (S605). In the RB start process, 8 is set in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is set in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games. Each counter such as the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. Further, in the RB start process, a set of RB commands transmitted to the display control device 81 is also performed so that the RB game is started.

Next, in the process of S606, a state command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the current gaming state. That is, if it is determined in the processing of S602 that the BB winning winning flag is not set (S602: No), a state command indicating that the game is a normal game is set, and the BB winning is established in the processing of S603. If it is determined that the game is not performed (S603: No), a state command indicating that the game is a BB carry-over game is set, and if an RB command is set in the process of S605, it means that the game is a BB game. Set the status command.

Then, after the process of S607, the game number display process is performed (S607), and this process is terminated. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, or the like is performed.

Further, in the process of S601, when the game state is the bonus state (S601: Yes), the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in the process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is small. It is confirmed whether or not the watermelon prize or the bell prize, which is the role prize, has been established (S608). When the watermelon prize or the bell prize is established in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S609), and the value of the remaining JAC game counter is further subtracted by 1 (S610). Further, when the watermelon winning and the bell winning are not established (S608: No), one JAC game is exhausted, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is subtracted by 1 without performing the processing of S609 (S608: No). S610).

Subsequently, in the process of S611, it is confirmed whether or not either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter becomes 0 (S611). It means that the end condition of the RB game is satisfied when any of them becomes 0 in the processing of S611, that is, when the JAC winning is established 8 times or the JAC game is digested 12 times (S611: Yes). Therefore, the RB end process for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). As a result, if the JAC game is played 12 times in one RB state and the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state can be terminated even before the JAC game is played 12 times.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S613), and if it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. , Since it means that the end condition of the BB game is not satisfied, the above-mentioned RB start process is executed (S614). After that, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0, that is, when the JAC winning has not been established 8 times and the JAC game has not been digested 12 times. (S611: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S615). If the counter value is not 0 in the process of S615 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the end condition of the BB game is not satisfied. To mean, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), the number of games display process is executed (S607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S615, when the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S615: Yes), it means that the end condition of the BB game is satisfied, so that the bonus state end process shown in S616 to S617 is satisfied. To execute. In the bonus state end process, first, the RB end process described above is executed (S616), and then the BB end process for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Further, in the process of S613 described above, even when the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S613: Yes), it means that the end condition of the BB game is satisfied, so that the BB end process of S617 is executed. To do. After performing the BB end process, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game (that is, a general game state) is set (S606), a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process is terminated. As a result, the bonus state can be terminated when the number of medals paid out reaches 250. Further, when the number of medals paid out reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be terminated by the processing of S616.

Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. The processing of the MPU 181 is roughly divided into a display main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1 msec in this embodiment), and a command input from the main control device 101. There is a command interrupt process that is started based on the above and stores the received command in the received command storage area 185a. The command stored in the received command storage area 185a is checked in the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the content of the command. Hereinafter, among the display main processing and the commands stored in the received command storage area 185a, the start command processing for processing the start command, the lottery result command processing for processing the lottery result command, and the processing for the error command are performed. Error command processing will be described.

First, the display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display main process. This display main process is executed when the power is turned on by the recovery from a power failure or the on operation of the power switch 71, and the initial stage of various devices such as the display control device 81 and the auxiliary effect unit controlled by the display control device 81. The conversion process, the check process of the command received from the main control device 101, the power failure process when a power failure occurs, and the like are performed. Further, the transfer process of the resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is also executed by the display surface process as one of the initialization processes.

When the display main process is executed, first, as one process of the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 181 and the I / O device are performed. (S701). Next, the process shifts to the process of S702, and as one process of the initialization process, the image resident in the resident video RAM 189 in the process of S702 to S710, that is, the main image at power-on, the background image, the character pattern, and the notification. Image data corresponding to each image such as an effect image and an error message image is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189.

Specifically, first, in the process of S702, the main image data at power-on is first read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S702). Then, when the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is then transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S703). If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is less than or equal to the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a (for example, 132 kilobytes), the processing of S702 and S703 can be performed once. When the power is turned on, all the main image data is transferred to the resident video RAM, so the process proceeds to S704 as it is. If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the main image data at power-on is the main image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 189. The processes of S702 and S703 are repeatedly executed until they are stored in 189a, and then the process proceeds to the process of S704.

Then, in the process of S704, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the main image when the power is turned on (S704). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and displays the drawn power-on main image. The corresponding drawn image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190, and then transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65 at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, and in this display, other image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the normal image is drawn by the processing of S711 described later in the image controller. It will continue until instructed by.

In this slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187 due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred to the video RAM 189. Therefore, as in the main display process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. By doing so, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. .. Therefore, the display control device 81 may transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 is immediately started to operate without any problem by power-on. By using the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 187, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

After the processing of S704, it is then confirmed whether the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) (S705), and the system state is a voltage. If it is in the lowered state (S705: Yes), it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and the power failure process is executed (S706).

On the other hand, in the processing of S705, when the system state is not the voltage drop state (S705: No), then the image data to be resident except the main image data at power-on is sequentially transferred from the character ROM 187 to the NAND flash memory 187a. One block is read and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S707). Then, when one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, it is determined whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is in use by reading the main image when the power is turned on (S708), and the resident video RAM 189 is used for resident use. While the video RAM 189 is in use (S708: Yes), the process of S708 is repeatedly executed to weight the process. Then, when it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is unused (S708: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the background image. It is stored in any of the area 189b, the character design area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d, and the error message image area 189e (S709).

In this way, when the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the time is taken from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed by passing through the buffer RAM 188a composed of the SRAM in the middle. The image data read by the buffer RAM 188a is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the resident video RAM 189 is unused, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time. Can be done. As a result, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the resident video RAM 189 can be prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data, so that the image controller 187 can be used. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 can be read out without delay at the time of image drawing, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn without delay, and the drawn image data is transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Can be done.

After the processing of S709, it is determined whether or not all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710), and if the untransferred resident image data remains (S710: No). , The process of S705 is returned to, the process of S705 to S710 is executed again, and the process of transferring the image data for one block from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, the process of S705 determines whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state each time one block of image data is transferred. As a result, even if the system state becomes a voltage drop state while the resident image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over a long period of time, the state can be surely grasped. it can.

When it is determined by the processing of S710 that all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710: Yes), it is then displayed in the normal time (when the special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S710). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the background image and the character symbol stored in the background image area 189b and the character symbol area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws a normal image, and temporarily draws the drawn image data into the normal video. After storing the data in the RAM 190, the process of transferring the data to the auxiliary display unit 65 at the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed. Therefore, a normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the initialization of the display control process has been completed.

Further, by the processing of S702 to S710, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization processing immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, after the initialization processing is completed, the resident video RAM 189 is used. The image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the resident image data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to the display of some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be maintained high. it can.

Subsequently, an interrupt mode for permitting command interrupt processing and display timer interrupt processing is set (S712), initialization processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to S713 processing. In the process of S713, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) as in the process of S705 (S713). If the system state is a voltage drop state (S713: Yes), it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and the power failure process is executed (S714).

On the other hand, in the process of S713, when the system state is not the voltage drop state (S713: No), then it is determined whether or not the display timer interrupt process is performed (S715), and the display timer interrupt process is performed. If (S715: Yes), the drive data output process for outputting the drive data to the auxiliary effect unit is executed (S716). As a result, the output of the drive data to the auxiliary effect unit is controlled so as to be executed in a 1 msec cycle in which the display timer interrupt process is performed. The determination of whether or not the display timer interrupt processing has been performed is turned on every time the display timer interrupt processing is executed, and is turned off every time the drive data output processing is executed. (Not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and is performed by detecting the value of the interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt processing execution flag is on, it is determined that the display timer interrupt processing has been performed (S715: Yes), and the drive data output processing is executed (S716).

In the processing of S715, it is determined that the display timer interrupt processing is not executed (S715: No), or when the processing of S716 is completed, the unprocessed reception command is then stored in the reception command storage area 185a. Whether or not it is determined (S717). Then, when there is an unprocessed received command (S717: Yes), the received command check process is executed (S718), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the received command is responded to. The process is executed (S719). For example, if the receive command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 19) is executed, if it is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if it is an error command, error command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. (See FIG. 21). The details of each command process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21.

In the processing of S717, it is determined that there is no unprocessed reception command in the reception command storage area 185a (S717: No), or when the processing of S718 is completed, the random value used when selecting the auxiliary effect is then calculated. The update process is executed (S719), the process returns to the process of S713, and then the processes of S713 to S719 are repeatedly executed.

Next, the start command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start command processing. This start command process is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command indicating that a game start command has been issued is received from the main control device 101. The MPU 181 stores a command received from the main control device 101 in the reception command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the reception command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is the start command. If it is determined, this start command processing is executed.

In this start command processing, first, information on the number of bets included in the start command is extracted, and the information on the extracted number of bets is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 of FIG. 13, the number of bets suggested by the information contained in the start command is the medal inserted by the player for the game in which the start command was indicated by the start command. By storing the information regarding the number of bets in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 assists the game to be started in the future according to the number of bets placed on the game. Control can be performed by the effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65).

Then, in the start command processing, other processing corresponding to the start command is executed, such as controlling the auxiliary production unit to execute various effects in response to the game start command grasped by receiving the start command (S802). ), End this process. As a result, it is possible to have the auxiliary production unit perform various effects at the start of the game.

Next, the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the lottery result command processing. In this lottery result command processing, a lottery result command indicating the result of the lottery (presence / absence determination of the winning combination) performed by the main control device 101 in response to the game start command by the operation of the start lever 41 is received from the main control device 101. This is the process that is executed when The MPU181 stores a command received from the main control device 101 in the reception command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the reception command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is a lottery result command. If it is determined that there is, this lottery result command processing is executed.

In the lottery result command processing, first, the information on the number of bets stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is three. It is determined whether or not (S901). Then, when the number of bets is three (S901: Yes), the effect corresponding to the number of bets is started in the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Set (S902), and end the lottery result command processing. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the set effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

At this time, when changing the background image or character symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on another command received from the main control device 101, it corresponds to the background image area 189b and the character symbol area 189c of the resident video RAM 189. If the image data of the background image or the character symbol is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the background image or the character symbol from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, it is possible to omit the time for newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time, so that the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. .. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, the background image and the character pattern can be changed immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the processing of S901 (S901: No), the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is 1 or 2. It can be grasped that it is a sheet. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the BB winning mode (S903). Then, when the BB winning mode is the winning combination (S903: Yes), the message "BB winning mode is won!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is the BB winning combination. Set the "BB prize notification effect" (S904), and end the lottery result command. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the BB prize notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

Further, as a result of the processing of S903, when the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode (S903: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S905). Then, when the watermelon winning mode is the winning combination (S905: Yes), the message "Watermelon winning mode is won!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is the watermelon winning mode. Set the "watermelon prize notification effect" (S906) and end the lottery result command. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the watermelon winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

Further, as a result of the processing of S905, when the winning combination is not in the watermelon winning mode (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command wins the bell. It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S907). Then, when the bell winning mode is the winning combination (S907: Yes), the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed with the message "Bell winning mode!" To notify the player that the winning combination is the bell winning mode. Set the "bell winning notification effect" (S908), and end the lottery result command. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the bell winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

In this way, the winning combination in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908 is any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode. In this case, the auxiliary production unit can be made to execute the BB prize notification effect, the watermelon prize announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect to notify the player that the role has been won.

Here, as described above, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning probabilities of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are suppressed to be extremely low, so that the player can use the BB winning mode. There is a high possibility that the game will be played with the expectation that the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode will be established, and conversely, the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode will be established. In addition, when the cherry bell winning mode or the 7 bell winning mode becomes a winning combination, the winning combination can be established without fail regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. A player who starts the game with two cards is likely to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as the winning combination, if the player does not notice it, the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all missed. Since there is a risk of winning, there is a risk that the winning combination will be missed. Further, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the games until the BB winning mode is established, if the player ends the game without noticing the winning of the BB winning mode, another player However, there is a risk that the BB winning mode will be established based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has assigned the winning of the BB winning mode will lose as a result.

On the other hand, in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won, the winning mode is won. Is announced by the BB prize announcement production, the watermelon prize announcement production, and the bell prize announcement production. Then, the notification is performed without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101. Therefore, as described above, the notification is performed while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. Will be. Therefore, the player can know the winning of any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode before operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the player plays the game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode, or bell winning mode) grasped by the notification. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the effective line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, if the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, the player may continue the game until the BB winning mode is established by receiving a new medal loan even if the game is missed. it can.

Further, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game and a plurality of winning combinations are set together with the winning combination in the lottery of this game, the sliding table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 In (see S310 in FIG. 14), a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set, but in this lottery result command processing, a lottery is performed when the number of bets is set to 1 or 2. The winning combination grasped by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination in which the sliding table is set is the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, the winning combination may be missed, but if the BB winning mode is set as the winning combination, Since the BB winning notification effect is given priority, the player can be surely grasped that the BB winning mode, which is more advantageous for the player, is the winning combination.

Further, as described above, in this lottery result command processing, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the reception command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main processing executed by the MPU 181, and the command is the lottery result. It is executed when it is determined to be a command. Then, the lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) in which the main control device 101 controls the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the lottery (determination of winning or failing of the winning combination) accompanying the game start command is completed. (See) is set before execution (see S309 in FIG. 14), and within about 1.5 ms at the latest (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process), the lottery result command is displayed and controlled. It is transmitted to the device 81.

Further, in the display control device 81, the image data corresponding to the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in various notification effects such as the BB prize notification effect, the watermelon prize announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect is notified of the resident video RAM 189. Since it is resident in the production image area 189d in advance, the display control device 81 performs the BB prize notification effect, the watermelon prize announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. When the above is determined, the image controller 188 reads the image data resident in advance in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189, instead of reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187. It is possible to draw each notification production image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 sequentially. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, each notification effect image is immediately received from the lottery result command. The images for the notification effect can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Therefore, between the time when the player operates the start lever 41 and the time when any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the notification effect of the winning combination is assisted. It can be executed by the effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, since the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any of the stop switches 42 to 44, the established winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode, or bell winning mode) is established. Can be surely aimed at the player.

As a result of the processing of S907, when the winning combination is not the bell winning mode (S907: No), if the number of bets is 2, the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, or the winning combination is If it can be grasped that it is not set (that is, it is out of order) and the number of bets is 1, the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode, or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, or the winning combination is won. It can be grasped that the combination is not set (that is, it is out of order). Therefore, next, the information regarding the number of bets stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether or not the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is two or not is confirmed. Judgment (S909).

Then, if the number of bets is two (S909: Yes), the message "Challenge the cherry bell!" Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, a dedicated voice is output from the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 is dedicated. The "cherry bell winning challenge effect" to be turned on in the above mode is set (S910), and the lottery result command processing is completed. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process. Further, if the number of bets is not two (S909: No), it can be grasped that the number of bets is one, so that the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed with the message "Challenge the cherry bell 7 bell!" A “cherry bell winning / 7 bell winning challenge effect” is set (S911) in which a dedicated sound is output from the speaker 64 and the upper lamp 63 is turned on in a dedicated manner, and the lottery result command processing is completed. As a result, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the cherry bell winning / 7 bell winning challenge effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

Since the "cherry bell winning challenge production" is executed in the auxiliary production section by the processing of S910, when the game is played with two medals, it is expected that three medals will be paid out by the establishment of the cherry bell winning mode. It is possible to give the player a strong feeling. Further, by the processing of S911, "cherry bell winning / 7 bell winning challenge production" is executed in the auxiliary production section, so when the game is played with one piece, the cherry bell winning or 7 bell winning mode is executed. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that three or two medals will be paid out upon establishment. Therefore, since the player can play the game by playing one or two medals while having fun, the player can be strongly reminded that he wants to play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

Next, the error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, the auxiliary effect unit notifies the error detected by the main control device 101, and the MPU 181 performs the work RAM 185 in the reception command check processing (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main processing. The command received from the main control unit 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the above, and when it is determined that the command is an error command, this error command processing is executed.

In this error command processing, first, information on the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, the display of the error message according to the extracted error type is set (S952), and the error command processing is terminated. As a result, the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the corresponding error message, the upper lamp 63 to blink, and the speaker 64 to sound an alarm sound. Each auxiliary production unit is driven.

Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. However, in the slot machine 10, the error is displayed. Since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the message image area 189e, the display control device 81 reads out the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. As a result, each error message image can be drawn immediately by the image controller 188. Therefore, since it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately read after receiving the error command. Can be displayed in.

As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on, so that the initialization is performed. After the processing is completed, the image controller 188 can perform the image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In particular, since the image data of the frequently displayed image and the image data of the image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are resident in the resident video RAM 189, the game It is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by a person to the display of some image on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Further, in the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transmitted from the character ROM 187 due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer to the resident video RAM 189, but after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is transferred. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the person concerned with the hall is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. You can check the image.

Therefore, the display control device 81 may transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 is immediately started to operate without any problem by power-on. Can be confirmed in. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 187, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 59, as a second embodiment, one embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 200 will be described. FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 200.

As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 200 has an outer frame 211 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 211 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 211. It is provided with an inner frame 212 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 218 are attached to the outer frame 211 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 22) in order to support the inner frame 212, and the side on which the hinge 218 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 212 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 213 (see FIG. 23) having a large number of nails, winning openings 263, 264, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 212 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 213. The inner frame 212 includes a ball launching unit 312a (see FIG. 25) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 213 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 312a to the front region of the game board 213. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front surface side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 covering the upper front surface thereof and a lower plate unit 215 covering the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 214 and the lower plate unit 215, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis The 214 and the lower plate unit 215 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 212 and the lock of the front frame 214 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 214 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 214c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 216 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 214, and the front surface of the game board 213 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 200 via the glass unit 216.

In the front frame 214, an upper plate 217 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 217. The bottom surface of the upper plate 217 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 217 is guided to the ball launching unit 312a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217. The frame button 222 is used, for example, when the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, the effect pattern of the variation display (variation effect) is changed, or the effect content at the time of reach effect is changed. It is operated by the player.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are unified. In this pachinko machine 200, there are three stages: "city stage", "underwater stage", and "sky stage". There are two stages. And, various productions such as variable production and reach production are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 222 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 222 is operated, the "city stage" → "underwater stage" "→" Sky stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

The front frame 214 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 214 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 229 to 233 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 214c. In the pachinko machine 200, these illumination units 229 to 233 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 229 to 233 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 214 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and an indicator lamp 234 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 232 on the right side, a small window 235 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 213 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to the pachinko machine (see 23) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 200. Further, in the pachinko machine 200, a plating member 236 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 229 to 233 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball lending operation unit 240 is arranged below the window unit 214c. The ball lending operation unit 240 is provided with a frequency display unit 241, a ball lending button 242, and a return button 243. When the ball lending operation unit 240 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 241 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 217 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 217 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the ball lending operation unit 240 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 215 located below the upper plate 217, a lower plate 250 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 217 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 213 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 251 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 312a. Touch sensor 251a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 251b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 251 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 213 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 252 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 250 when the ball stored in the lower plate 250 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 250. The ball pulling lever 252 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 250 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 252 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 250 is placed below the lower plate 250. An operation handle 251 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 250 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 250.

As shown in FIG. 23, the game board 213 has a wooden base plate 260 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 261,262, a general winning opening 263, and a first. The ball entry port 264, the variable winning device 265, the variable display device unit 280, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 212. The general winning opening 263, the first winning opening 264, the variable winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 213. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 213 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 212 through the window portion 214c (see FIG. 22) of the front frame 214. The configuration of the game board 213 will be described below.

An outer rail 262 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 213, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 262 like the outer rail 262. The arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 213, and the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 22) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 213 is a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed by dividing the front surface of the game board 213 by two rails 261,262 and an arc member 270. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 261,262 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 312a to the upper part of the game board 213. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 261 (upper left portion in FIG. 23) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 213 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 269 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right part in FIG. 23) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 269 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 270 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 261 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 262. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 260.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 237a and a 7-segment display 237b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 23). A display device 237 is arranged. The first symbol display device 237 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 310, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200. The plurality of LEDs 237a indicate whether or not the ball is changing depending on the lighting state, or as a stop symbol after the end of the change, the result of a lottery performed for entering the ball (starting prize) into the first ball opening 264. The corresponding symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of holdings is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 237a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 200 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 264, whether or not it is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and time saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 237a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, the "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time saving state occurs during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 264. On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters the 264. In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 264 is opened, or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened by hitting may be changed.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 263 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 280 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a third symbol in a variable manner triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 264 (starting prize). A third symbol display device 281 and a second symbol display device 283 composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at the second entry port 267 are provided.

The third symbol display device 281 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 314 described later, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281.

Further, in the variable display device unit 280, a center frame 286 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 310 by the first symbol display device 237, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 237 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 281.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 264 before the stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 237, the number of ball entries is held up to 4 times, and the number of holds is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 237 and also by the number of lighting of the hold lamp 285. Four holding lamps 285 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged above the third symbol display device 281. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 264 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 285 is deleted, and the number of hold times of the variation display based on the entry into the first entry port 264 is set as a part of the third symbol display device 281 by a number or an area divided into four. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, since the number of holds is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the hold lamp 285 may not be used to display the lighting.

The second symbol display device 283 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately lit as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second entry port 267. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 283 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first ball entry port 264 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 267 is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 237 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 284. Four second symbol holding lamps 284 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 281.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 283 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 281. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 284 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 281. Further, the maximum number of times of holding of the second ball opening 267 is not limited to four as in the case of the first ball opening 264, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example,). It may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp 284.

Below the variable display device unit 280, a first ball entry port 264 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 264, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 310, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237. In addition, the first entry slot 264 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 265 is arranged below the first ball opening 264, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 265a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery in the main control device 310 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on and the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 265a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 265a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 265a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 265 has a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 265a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 265a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 265a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 237a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 237, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 265a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 265a while the opening 265a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps and identification labels are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213, and the certificate stamps and the like attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 214. It can be visually recognized through the small window 235 (see FIG. 22).

Further, the game board 213 is provided with an out port 266. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 263, 264, 265a is guided through the out opening 266 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 213 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 24, the control board units 290 and 291 and the back pack unit 294 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 200. The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 310), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 313), and a display control board (display control device 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 311), a launch control board (launch control device 312), a power supply board (power supply device 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

In the back pack unit 294, the back pack 292 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 293 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313 and the display control device 314, the payout control device 311 and the emission control device 312, the power supply device 315, and the card unit connection board 316 are housed in the board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. .. The board boxes 300 to 304 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 300 (main control device 310) and the board box 302 (payout control device 311 and launch control device 312), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 300, 302, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 300, 302, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 300 and 302 have been opened.

The payout unit 293 includes a tank 330 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 294 and opened upward, a tank rail 331 connected below the tank 330 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 331. It is provided with a case rail 332 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 333 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 416 (see FIG. 25). ing. The tank 330 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 333. A vibrator 334 for adding vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320, the launch control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321 and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322. The state return switch 320 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 25). The operation knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 200 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200.

The main control device 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 401 is a ROM 402 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 401, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 402 is executed. A certain RAM 403 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 311 and the voice lamp control device 313, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 310 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 200, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 283. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 283. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 403. The RAM 403 is provided with a hold ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has access to the first entry port 264. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored according to the ball entry timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 is reached at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 264. Stored in. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main control device, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot, it is judged as a jackpot. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (during the period during which the probability is not changing) and the other for high probability (during probability change) where the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than that of the low probability. The number of random numbers included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time and the high probability time.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of a big hit, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and the maximum value (for example, for example). In the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 9, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball of the RAM 403 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 264. Stored in the area.

Therefore, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the hold ball storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of disconnection.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is the one at the time of big hit. It becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values that are big hits at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big hit random number table at low probability. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 30, and the values are "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448". , 486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table.

In the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table and the value of the jackpot random number stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table are duplicated values. The value of each big hit random number is set so that it does not become. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 200, the value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 9. In this first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "6,7,8,9", the jackpot type is "15R probability change" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. On the other hand, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "4,5", the jackpot type is "2R probability change" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 1, 2, 3", the jackpot type shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. At the same time, it is a "time saving jackpot" in which the time is shortened for 100 fluctuations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured so that three types of hit types (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 281, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and reach occurs. No Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (eg, range 0-89). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball wins the first ball entry port 264, the value of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 403 is reached. It is stored.

Further, the ROM 402 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop pattern is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 264. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than front-back deviation" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than front-back deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 264 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 281 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281 are determined by the voice lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314. .. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 267. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 283 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first entry port 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

As described above, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 310, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 283.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 26, the RAM 403 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 401 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 401 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored. Further, the RAM 403 has at least a hold count counter 403a. The RAM 403 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 315 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 403. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 403. The writing to the RAM 403 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 40) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU 401. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The hold count counter 403a holds the number of holds of the variation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 281) performed by the first symbol display device 237 based on the ball entering the first ball opening 264 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts (waiting count) up to 4 times. The initial value of the hold count counter 403a is set to zero, and each time a ball is inserted into the first entry port 264 and the number of hold of the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( See S1403 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the hold count counter 403a is decremented by 1 each time the variation display based on the ball entering the first ball opening 264 (starting winning) is executed (see S1204 in FIG. 35).

The value of the hold count counter 403a (that is, the hold count) is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the hold count command (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The hold count command is 2 bytes (16 bits) transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 each time the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 264 and the hold count counter 403a is incremented by 1. It is a configuration command. The voice lamp control device 313 lights the hold lamps 285 as many times as the number of hold lamps 285 based on the value of the hold count counter 403a notified by the hold count command.

Here, the configuration of the hold count command will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a bit configuration of the hold count command. In the following description, among the 2-byte commands, the upper byte is referred to as a higher byte, and the lower byte is referred to as a lower byte. Further, in each byte, the most significant bit (MSB) is defined as the “7th bit” and the least significant bit (LSB) is defined as the “0th bit”.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the hold count command, the 7th to 4th bits of the high-order byte are composed of a fixed value "0111" (binary number), whereby this command is a hold count command. Show that. The voice lamp control device 313 confirms the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the high-order byte among the commands received from the main control device 310, and receives the command when the value is "0111" (binary number). Recognize that the command is a hold count command (see S2007 in FIG. 44).

In addition, among the hold count commands, the lower byte is composed of the hold count. When transmitting the hold count command to the voice lamp control device 313, the main control device 310 sets the value of the hold count counter 403a, which is incremented by 1 when the ball enters the first entry port 264 (starting prize), as the hold count. It is applied to the 2nd to 0th bits of the lower byte of the command. Further, 0 is set in all the 7th to 3rd bits of the lower byte of the hold count command. Thereby, the entire lower byte of the hold count command can represent the hold count of the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 237 based on the entry into the first entry port 264 (starting winning).

When the voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold count command from the main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313 extracts the hold count of the variation display held by the main control device 310 from the lower byte of the received hold count command (S2008 in FIG. 44). reference). In this way, the voice lamp control device 313 has the hold count itself of the variation display held in the main control device 310 by the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 310 every time the hold count counter 403a is incremented by 1. You can get the value. As a result, the number of hold times of the variable display managed by the hold count counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the actual hold number of the variable display held by the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even in this case, the deviation can be corrected by the hold count command received next.

On the other hand, the hold count command also plays a role as a continuous notice permission command for instructing the voice lamp control device 313 whether or not to allow the third symbol display device 281 to display the continuous notice effect. The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests (notices) that the result of the lottery performed in connection with the entry into the first entrance 264 (starting prize) is likely to be a big hit. This is an effect in which the same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 together with the variation effect over all the variation effects (variation display) that are sometimes reserved. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281 together with the pending variation effect, the player is expected to become a big hit after all the reserved variation effects are completed. Can be held against.

As shown in FIG. 27, the role of the hold count command as the continuous notice permission command is the continuous notice permission flag represented by the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command and the continuous notice represented by the 0th bit of the upper byte. This is done by the post-game status flag. The continuous notice permission flag indicates whether or not to allow the display of the continuous notice effect to the third symbol display device 281, and when the value is "1", the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It indicates that the display is permitted, and in the case of "0", it indicates that the display of the continuous notice effect is not permitted to the third symbol display device 281. Further, the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the hit / fail judgment performed at the time of entering the first ball entry port 264 which is the transmission trigger of the hold count command). It indicates whether it is a "big hit" or "missing", and when the value is "1", it indicates "big hit", and when it is "0" (binary number), it indicates "missing".

In the main control device 310, apart from the big hit lottery (see S1301 in FIG. 36) executed at the start of fluctuation, the first hit random number counter is also used when entering the first ball entry port 264, which is a transmission trigger of the hold count command. C1, the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the hold ball storage area, and from each of the stored counters, a hit / fail judgment is made to determine whether or not the counter value is a big hit. , The jackpot type at the time of a jackpot, and the stop pattern at the time of a miss are determined. Then, the continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after the continuous notice are set based on the result of the hit / fail determination performed at the time of entering the first ball entrance 264.

For example, if the result of the determination is "15R probability variation jackpot", the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1", the game status flag after continuous notice is set to "1" (see S1407 in FIG. 37), and "front and back are out of alignment". In the case of "reach", the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1", and the game status flag after continuous notice is set to "0" (see S1409 in FIG. 37). In other cases, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "0", and the game status flag after continuous notice is set to "0" (see S1410 in FIG. 37). In this way, when the jackpot is the most advantageous gaming state for the player (15R probability variation jackpot), or even if it is off, the reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot ( The value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1" only when the reach is out of front and back. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the player can have a high expectation.

When the hold count command is received by the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 confirms the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command, and the value is ". If it is "1", the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S2107 in FIG. 45). At this time, in the voice lamp control device 313, the predetermined probability of determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous advance notice determination probability”) is the 0th bit (that is, continuous) of the upper byte of the hold count command. It is configured to be changed according to the value of the game state flag after the notice (see S2103 to S2105 in FIG. 45). The change of this predetermined probability will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

As described above, among the processes related to the continuous advance notice effect, the main control device 310 only determines the permission of the continuous advance notice effect based on the result of the determination performed when the ball is entered into the first entry port 264. The determination result is included in the hold count command as a continuous advance notice permission flag and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. Then, the voice lamp control device 313 determines the actual start of the continuous advance notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous advance notice effect based on the value of the continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command. As a result, the processing in the main control device 310 can be concentrated in the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, which is the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the entry into the first ball entry port 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 313, it is possible to set a wide variety of production modes for the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, in the main control device 310, it is determined that the jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is one step before the jackpot for the player even if it is off. In the case of reaching to make an impression (reach out of front and back), the continuous notice effect is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 including the continuous notice permission flag for permitting the continuous notice effect in the hold count command. That is, not only the result of the judgment made when the ball is entered into the first entry port 264 is a big hit, but also in the case of a front-rear out-of-reach reach, the main control device 310 allows continuous advance notice effect, and the information is a voice lamp. Since it is transmitted to the control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of a front-back disengagement reach or the like. As a result, even if the lottery results in continuous deviations, the continuous advance notice effect can give the player a high expectation, and the player will be bored. Can be prevented.

Further, when the continuous notice effect is permitted, the hold count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 after the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "1". Therefore, with this one hold count command, two pieces of information, the hold count and the continuous notice permission flag, can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, in addition to being able to accurately grasp that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted, the number of pending variable effects (number of hold times) to which the continuous advance notice effect is added can be determined. It can be grasped accurately. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 313 is easier than in the case where the hold count of the variation effect and the continuous notice permission flag are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 by another command. Can be.

Further, since the hold count command in the present embodiment also includes the game status flag after the continuous notice, in addition to the hold count of the variable effect and the continuous notice permission flag, the information regarding the game status flag after the continuous notice is also controlled by the voice lamp. The device 313 can be accurately grasped. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the continuous advance notice determination probability or select the continuous advance notice effect mode based on the game state flag after the continuous advance notice. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable effect, the permission information of the continuous notice effect, and the information based on the game state after the continuous notice effect are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, the hold count command By including them in one, the control in the voice lamp control device 313 can be facilitated.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. An input / output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 via a bus line 404 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 405 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 311, the voice lamp control device 313, the first symbol display device 237, the second symbol display device 283, the second symbol hold lamp 284, and the specific winning opening 265a. A solenoid 409 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 401 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 405. To send. Further, various switches 408 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 453 described later provided in the power supply device 315 are connected to the input / output port 405, and the MPU 401 is output from the various switches 408. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 453.

The payout control device 311 drives the payout motor 416 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 411, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 412 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 411, and a RAM 413 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, the RAM 413 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 413 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 315 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 411, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 310, a payout motor 416, a launch control device 312, and the like are connected to the input / output port 415, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311 but not to the main control device 310.

The launch control device 312 controls the ball launch unit 312a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 251 when the main control device 310 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launching unit 312a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 251a that the player is touching the operation handle 251 and the stop switch 251b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 251 and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 251.

The voice lamp control device 313 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 426, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination unit 229 to 233, indicator lamp 234, hold lamp 285, etc.) 427. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 such as the variation effect (variation display) and the continuous notice effect. The MPU 421, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 422 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 421, and a RAM 423 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 310, a display control device 314, an audio output device 426, a lamp display device 427, a vibration sensor 428, a frame button 222, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222, and when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed or the fluctuation display (variation) is performed. The audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are controlled, and the display control device 314 is instructed to change the effect pattern of the effect) or change the effect content at the time of reach effect. When the stage is changed, a background image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 314 so that the background image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. ..

Further, the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213. In the pachinko machine 200, since entering the ball into the entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that the pachinko machine 200 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 314. The display control device 314 controls the third symbol display device 281 to display an error message image according to the type of error (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

At least the continuous notice determination table 422a is stored in the ROM 422 of the voice lamp control device 313. Further, the RAM 423 is provided with at least a hold count counter 423a, a continuous notice determination counter 423b, a continuous notice count register 423c, a continuous notice number counter 423d, a continuous notice mode counter 423e, and a continuous notice mode flag 423f. Here, for convenience of explanation, the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b and the continuous advance notice determination table 422a will be described first, and then the remaining counters, flags, and registers will be described.

The continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is a loop counter used for determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect, and is updated once every time the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the voice lamp control device 313 is executed. The continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is updated, for example, by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 127, reaching the maximum value (that is, 127), and then returning to 0.

The voice lamp control device 313 sets the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b and the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b, which will be described later, when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 310 is "1". The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the continuous advance notice determination table 422a (see S2106 and S2107 in FIG. 45).

In the continuous notice determination table 422a, when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 310 is "1", that is, from the main control device 310 to the third symbol display device. This is a table for setting the "continuous notice determination probability" when there is a notification permitting the display of the continuous notice effect in 281. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is the probability of deciding to start the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 281 when receiving a notification permitting the display of the continuous notice effect. The voice lamp control device 313 compares the continuous advance notice determination table 422a with the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b, and when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is within the range indicated by the continuous advance notice determination table 422a, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 281 is to start the continuous advance notice effect (see S2106 and S2107 in FIG. 45).

Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 422a will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 422a. As shown in FIG. 28, the continuous notice determination table 422a has two tables, a jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 and a missed continuous notice determination table 422a2. When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control unit 310 is "1", the voice lamp control device 313 has the 0th bit (0th bit) of the upper byte of the hold count command. The table used for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous advance notice determination table 422a according to the game state flag after the continuous advance notice). That is, when the game state flag after continuous notice is "1" (the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is "big hit"), the big hit continuous notice determination table 422a1 is selected, and the game state flag after continuous notice is "0". (The gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off"), the continuous notice determination table 422a2 at the time of off is selected (see S2103 to S2105 in FIG. 45). As a result, the probability of determining the continuous advance notice can be changed according to the game state (whether it is a "big hit" or "missing") after the continuous advance notice effect is completed.

Both the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 422a2 can be taken by the hold count counter 423a (the number of hold of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 310) in the voice lamp control device 313. The range of the continuous notice determination counter 423b (hereinafter, referred to as "continuous notice determination range") for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is defined in association with the values "1" to "4".

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 28, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the hold count counter 423a, and the value of the hold count counter 423a. "0 to 15" is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with "2", and "0 to 39" is specified as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the hold count counter 423a, and is held. In association with the value "4" of the number-of-times counter 423a, "0 to 63" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range.

Further, the continuous notice determination table 422a2 at the time of disconnection defines "0" as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value "1" of the hold count counter 423a, and associates it with the value "2" of the hold count counter 423a. , "0-9" is specified as the continuous notice determination range, and "0 to 25" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the hold count counter 423a, and the value "0" of the hold count counter 423a is specified. In association with "4", "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

The voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold count command from the main control device 310, and determines the continuous notice when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is "1". When either the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 422a1 or the missed continuous advance notice determination table 422a2 is selected as the table for setting the probability, the value of the hold count counter 423a at that time is changed from the selected continuous advance notice determination table. The associated continuous advance notice determination range is specified, and when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b at that time is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined.

By the way, in both the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 422a2 in the example of FIG. 28, it is defined that the larger the value of the hold count counter 423a, the wider the continuous advance notice determination range. However, if the continuous advance notice determination range is wide, it becomes easier to determine that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, and the continuous advance notice determination probability becomes high. Therefore, both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 422a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 422a2 It can be said that the greater the number of times the fluctuation display is held in the main control device 310, the higher the probability of continuous advance notice determination. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the variable effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is decided, the larger the number of holds, the higher the continuous notice decision probability can be set. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous advance notice effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the more the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects, the more the effect is different from the normal effect, which is special to the player. You can have a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of hold times for variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect from being performed frequently, while the number of hold times is high. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

Further, when the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 422a2 in the example of FIG. 28 are compared, the continuous notice determination range associated with the same value of the hold count counter 423a is the jackpot continuous. The notice determination table 422a1 is defined to be the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 422a2 at the time of disconnection. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off". Is also set to be high. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous notice effect. , It is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In addition, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the result of the determination performed at the time of entering the first ball entrance 264) becomes a "big hit" is usually higher than the probability that the game state becomes a "missing". Since it is set small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not frequently performed when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", while in the case of "big hit", it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect. It is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

In this way, in the main control device 310, not only the result of the hit / fail judgment performed when the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 264 is a big hit, but also in the case of the front-back deviation reach, the permission judgment of the continuous notice effect is made. However, the determination result is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 as a continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 313 may determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of front-back deviation reach or the like according to the determination result (value of the continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command) and various conditions. Therefore, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect under a wide variety of conditions. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is performed. In addition, even if the lottery results in continuous deviations, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a high expectation and the player can be prevented from getting bored. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The hold count counter 423a of the RAM 423 is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281), and is the number of hold times of the variation effect held by the main control device 310. It is a counter that counts (waiting count) up to 4 times. When the voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 310 when the hold count of the variable display is added by entering the first ball entry port 264, the hold count command is received. The value of the hold count counter 403a of the main controller 310 (that is, the hold count of the fluctuation display held by the main controller 310) stored in the lower byte of is stored in the hold count counter 423a (see S2008 in FIG. 44). ).

Further, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the fluctuation pattern command which is the instruction command for the fluctuation display from the main control device 310 and sets the mode of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the reception, the voice lamp control device 313 holds the command. The value of the count counter 423a is subtracted by 1 (see S2207 in FIG. 47). In this way, since the value of the hold count counter 423a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310.

The value of the hold count counter 423a is used for the lighting process of the hold lamp 285. That is, of the four hold lamps 285 provided, only the number of hold lamps 285 corresponding to the value of the hold count counter 423a is turned on, and the remaining hold lamps 285 are turned off (see S1905 in FIG. 42). Further, the value of the hold count counter 423a is a case where the continuous notice determination range is set according to the number of holds from the continuous notice determination table 422a (either the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 or the continuous notice determination table 422a2 at the time of disconnection). (See S2106 in FIG. 45). Further, the value of the hold count counter 423a is also used for setting the continuous notice count register 423c when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S2108 in FIG. 45).

The continuous advance notice number register 423c is a register that defines the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the hold count command received from the main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313 stores the value of the hold count counter 423c at that time in the continuous notice count register 423c. Then, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed is defined so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at the time of determining the continuous advance notice effect (see S2108 in FIG. 45).

The continuous advance notice number counter 423d is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed. The initial value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the hold number command received from the main control device 110, the continuous advance notice effect number counter 223d is set to 1. (See S2109 in FIG. 45).

Then, when the variation pattern command, which is the instruction command for the variation effect, is received from the main control device 310, the MPU 421 refers to the continuous advance notice effect number counter 223d, and while the value indicates a value other than 0, the third symbol The display device 281 is set to perform the continuous notice effect, and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the values of the continuous notice mode flag 423f, the continuous notice count register 423c, and the continuous notice count counter 423d. (See FIG. 48). Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 0, since the start decision of the continuous advance notice effect has not been made, the continuous advance notice effect is set to not executed (see S2252 in FIG. 48).

When the mode of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the update process of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is performed (see S2663 in FIG. 48), and when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d before the update is 0, that is, the continuous advance notice effect If the start decision of is not made, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is continuously held at 0.

If the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d before the update is other than 0 and is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is incremented by 1 and the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d before the update is increased. If is other than 0 and is equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is reset to 0. As a result, the mode of the continuous advance notice effect is set so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed the number of executions specified by the continuous advance notice number register 423c.

Here, as described above, the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c is the value of the hold number counter 423a at the time when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, that is, is held by the main control device 110 at that time. This is the number of times the variable effect is held. Therefore, by performing the update processing of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d as described above, the continuous advance notice effect is generated for all the variable effects held in the main control device 110 when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. The mode is set, and the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, since the determination of the continuous advance notice effect is made based on the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous advance notice effect through the continuous advance notice effect. it can.

The continuous notice mode counter 423e is a counter used for selecting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. In the pachinko machine 200, two types of modes are prepared as the production modes of the continuous notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Among them, one aspect is a step-up effect type continuous advance notice effect, and another aspect is the same effect type continuous advance notice effect.

In the step-up type continuous notice production, "eggs" are displayed during the first fluctuation production, "chicks" are displayed during the second fluctuation production, and "chicken" is displayed during the third fluctuation production. This is an embodiment in which the "chicken group" is displayed during the fourth variation effect. Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c is 3 or less, that is, the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3 or less, the last set of the continuous advance notice effect is set regardless of the number of continuous advance notice executions. Display the "chicken group" in the variable effect.

As a result, each time the variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281, the symbol displayed by the continuous advance notice effect gradually changes (steps up), so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By looking at it, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that when the chicken group is displayed, it will be a big hit in the variable effect in which the chicken group is displayed. In addition, when the variable effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken group", and the variable effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 2. In some cases, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chicken group", and when the variable effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 1, the "chicken group" is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is suddenly displayed, so that the player can display the suddenly displayed chicken group. Looking at it, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production in which the chicken group is displayed.

On the other hand, in the continuous advance notice effect of the same effect type, "bubbles" are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the change effect is stopped, except for the last change effect among the change effects set for the continuous advance notice effect. It is a production to make you. As a result, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect and the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot or the time saving jackpot does not appear, "bubbles" are continuously displayed immediately after the stop. , It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous advance notice production, and it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game.

The continuous notice mode counter 423e is updated once every time the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 313 is executed (see S2001 in FIG. 44). The continuous advance notice mode counter 423e is updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 15 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 15).

When the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the voice lamp control device 313 determines the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect according to the value of the continuous advance notice mode counter 423e. In the present embodiment, when the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is 3 to 7, the same effect type continuous notice effect is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, and when the value is other value, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is set. As a step-up type continuous notice production is set.

The effect mode of the continuous notice mode determined here is set to the continuous notice mode flag 423f. Specifically, when a step-up type continuous notice effect is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, "0" is set in the continuous notice mode flag 423f, and the same effect type continuous notice effect is set. In this case, "1" is set in the continuous notice mode flag 423f (S210 to S2112 in FIG. 45).

This continuous notice mode flag 423f is referred to by the voice lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation pattern command, which is an instruction command for the fluctuation effect, is received from the main control device 310, and the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d is other than 0. When the continuous advance notice mode flag 423f is "0", it is displayed together with the variable effect according to the values of the continuous advance notice number register 423c and the continuous advance notice number counter 423d so that the step-up type continuous advance notice effect is performed. The design to be set is set from "tamago", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group". Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and the continuous advance notice mode flag 423f is "1", the symbol to be displayed after the variable effect is stopped so that the same effect type continuous advance notice effect is performed is ". Set "Foam".

Further, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the voice lamp control device 313 generates a continuous notice setting command including the value of the continuous notice number register 423c and the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f, and the display control device 313 generates a continuous notice setting command. Send to 314. As a result, the display control device 314 grasps the number of continuous notices of the continuous notice effect to be executed from the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, and grasps the mode of the continuous notice effect from the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f. Then, the image drawing control related to the continuous advance notice effect is executed accordingly.

The RAM 423 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 310 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the voice lamp processing device 313 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process S2002 , S2005, S2007, S2010, the command is analyzed, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 310 is received (see S2003 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 281. (See S2203 in FIG. 47).

The display control device 314 is connected to the voice lamp control device 313 and the third symbol display device 281, and changes in the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 313. It controls the display (variable effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

The power supply device 315 is provided with a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 322 (see FIG. 24). It has an erasing switch circuit 453. The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 310 to 314 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 451 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 408, a solenoid such as a solenoid 409, a motor, and the like, and a 12 volt voltage. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 310 to 314 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 451 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 310 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is turned on, the main control device 310 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 311 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 311.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 314. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a ROM (program ROM) 432, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, and an output port 439. And the bus lines 440 and 441.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 313 is connected to the input side of the input port 438, and the MPU 431, ROM 432, work RAM 433, character ROM 434, and image controller 437 are connected to the output side of the input port 438 via the bus line 440. ing. A resident video RAM 435 and a normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437, and an output port 439 is connected via the bus line 441. Further, a third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439.

Even if the pachinko machine 200 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is available. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 431, the character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the ROM 432 and the work RAM 433 will be described.

First, the MPU 431 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 313.

The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, the image controller 188, and the resident video RAM 189 provided in the display control device 314 of the slot machine 10 in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190.

That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. Therefore, since a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player. It has become.

Further, the character ROM 434 is the same as the arbitration circuit 187b provided in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, which executes data address conversion in order to avoid a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 434a and read / write data. A known arbitration circuit 434b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) having a function is provided.

The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing, and transfers the drawn image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in advance when the power is turned on. The image is drawn by using the image data that is resident and is transferred from the character ROM 435 to the normal video RAM 436 each time based on the instruction of the MPU 431.

Here, since some of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on, the image resident in the resident video RAM 435 after the initialization process is completed. The image controller 437 can perform image drawing processing while using the data. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In particular, the resident video RAM 435 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310 or the display control device 314. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, the image controller 437 has a buffer RAM 437a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 434a, similarly to the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment. doing.

Here, in the first embodiment, when the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 directly reads the data for one block from the character ROM 187 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 188a. In anticipation of when the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is not in use, the MPU 181 executes a process of transferring the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video 189 or the normal video RAM 190. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the image controller 437 executes the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on the instruction from the MPU 431.

Specifically, when the MPU 431 determines the necessity of transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, and determines that the image data needs to be transferred, the transfer should be performed. The start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data is stored, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190), and the transfer destination (resident). A transfer command including the start address of the video RAM 189 (or the normal video RAM 190) is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437. The transfer command may include the address at the end of the character ROM 434 in which the image data is stored, instead of the data size of the image data to be transferred.

When the image controller 437 receives the transfer command, the image controller 437 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 437a according to various information included in the transfer command, and temporarily stores the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video. When the RAM 436 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data corresponding to the data size indicated by the transfer command is transferred (see FIG. 59).

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is performed by the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 281 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

Similar to the display control device 81 in the first embodiment, the resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and the power is turned on. The time main image area 435a, the background image area 435c, the character symbol area 435e, and the error message image area 435f are provided, and at least the variable image area 435b and the third symbol area 435d when the power is turned on are provided.

Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 435a is connected to the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at the time of power-on. This is the area for storing the data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on. Further, in the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 310 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 451, the MPU 431 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. Sends a transfer command to the image controller 437 (see S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 50).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at the time of power-on. First, while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at the time of power-on, normally, as shown in FIG. 30A, only the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the three symbol display device 281.

On the other hand, when the display fluctuation pattern command, which is an instruction command for starting fluctuation, is received from the voice lamp control device 313 while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the display control device 314 receives the display fluctuation pattern command. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a “○” symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and a stop image when the power is turned on and as shown in FIG. 30 (c). At the same position as the "○" symbol, the power-on stop image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 310 is determined from the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command from the voice lamp control device 313, and if it is a "big hit", FIG. 30 (b). The image shown in FIG. 30 (c) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "off", the image shown in FIG. 30C is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is completed, the MPU 431 supplies power to the image controller 437 using the image data stored in the main image area 435a at power-on. By instructing the drawing of the main image at the time of turning on, the main image at the time of turning on the power shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, the MPU 431 controls the display control device 314 so that the main image is displayed when the power is turned on until the initialization process is completed. On the other hand, in the initialization process, a transfer command is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437 so that the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. To.

In this way, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the person concerned with the hall confirms the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Can be done. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 281 is started without any problem by power-on. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the entry into the first entrance ball 264 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to perform the fluctuation effect, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the power is turned on. If an entry is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are stored in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variable image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435, a momentary power failure occurs. If the data resident in the resident video RAM 435 remains, the image data resident in the main image area 435a when the power is turned on and the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on at the time of power restoration is used to power the power supply. The main image at the time of turning on and the fluctuating image at the time of turning on the power can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The background image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 281, similarly to the background image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the background image and the range of the background image stored in the background image area 435c among the background images will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic view schematically showing a range of three types of background images and a background image stored in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each background image. FIG. 31 (a). 31 (b) corresponds to the background B corresponding to the “underwater stage”, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the background corresponding to the “sky stage”. For C, the range of the background image stored in the background image area 435c is schematically shown.

As the background image corresponding to each of the backgrounds A to C, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is prepared in the character ROM 434. The image controller 437 draws an image so that the background image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the backgrounds A to C (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the background images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 281 is smooth. The background image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 222 is operated by the player to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets the area between the position a and the position a'as the initial position of the display area, and the image of the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed on 281. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 281 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each background image, the range of the background image stored in the background image area 435c will be described. The background A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the background A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the background A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the background image area. By making it resident in the 435d, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the background B corresponding to the underwater stage and the background C corresponding to the sky stage, only a part of the background area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the resident video RAM 435. It is stored in the background image area 435d.

Here, the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, so that even if the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing, In order to change the background image immediately, it is ideal that the image data of the entire scrolled range (the image corresponding to the position a to the position d) is resident in the resident video RAM 435 for all the background images. However, if this is done, a RAM having a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 435, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the background image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, the stage is changed even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed. In this case, for the image in the range from at least the position a to the position b, the initial position of the background B or the background C is immediately set to the third position by using the image data resident in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 281 and can be scrolled. Further, with respect to the background B and the background C, since only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 and suppress an increase in cost. it can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right, the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer to the background image E area 436e can be completed. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data is stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data, the image data corresponding to the background image stored in the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 is used without delay, and the position b' The range of the position d can be scrolled from the position d to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, the image data stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the background image E area 436e of the RAM 436, the background image scrolls smoothly to the third symbol display device 281. It is supposed to be displayed.

Further, the MPU 431 uses the image data of the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area. Then, the MPU 431 displays the image between the position a and the position a'as the display area on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data of the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. Controls the image controller 437. As a result, the third symbol display device 281 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

As described above, as for the image data corresponding to the background B and the background C, only the image data corresponding to a part of the background is stored in the background image area 435c, so that the capacity of the background image area 435c can be kept small. it can.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the display content of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a variation effect screen of the third symbol display device 281, and is a schematic view showing an actual screen and effective line settings when the variation effect scrolls sideways.

The third symbol consists of 10 main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" and one sub-symbol formed smaller than the main symbol (in the present embodiment). , A picture of a shellfish). These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub-symbols between the main symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 310 is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable effect is completed. It is configured as. When shifting to the "probability change jackpot", a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the "time saving jackpot", a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols corresponding to even numbers are aligned.

The variation effect is performed so that the main symbol and the sub symbol scroll (horizontally scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity for each symbol row. As shown in FIG. 32, at the time of such side-scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol rows are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 32, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281, the third symbol is displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 displays a total of nine third symbols in 3 rows × 3 rows.

Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, five lines, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5, are set as effective lines. Then, in each game, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on one of the effective lines when the variable effect scrolling horizontally is stopped, a jackpot movie will be displayed as a jackpot. Is displayed. In the case of side-scrolling, the variation effect is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

The third symbol area 435d includes a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 281, that is, ten main symbols composed of ten character symbols corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9". Image data corresponding to one type of sub-symbol formed smaller than this main symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 281 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 264, the variation effect is immediately started on the third symbol display device 281 even though the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 237. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which it is not performed.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The character symbol area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281, as in the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 200, characters of "girl" and "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 435e, so that the display control device When the character symbol is changed based on the content of the command received from the main control device 313, the 314 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, but resides in advance in the character symbol area 435e of the resident video RAM 435. By reading out the image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 437. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187.

The error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200, similarly to the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 200, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 313 from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the voice lamp control device 313 displays the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify 314. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by the error command. .. When the display control device 314 receives an error command, the display control device 314 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 200, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 435f, so that the display control device 314 receives an error message of the resident video RAM 435 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 435f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the successive error messages from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 434, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed in.

The normal video RAM 436 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, like the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, and the image controller 437 uses the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435. When drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is temporarily stored. Here, the MPU 431 decomposes the moving image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 into several components, reads out desired image data from the character ROM 434 for each component, and stores the moving image in the normal video RAM 436. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 as described above. For example, in the fluctuation effect, the variation start display part, the advance notice effect display part, the normal reach display part, the super reach display part, and the hit effect display part are decomposed into components, and the image data required for each is separated from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Instruct the image controller 437 to transfer to.

Then, the normal video RAM 436 serves as an area for storing the image data of each component, that is, the first priority image A area 436a, the first priority image B area 436b, the second priority image C area 436c, and the second priority image D area. It has at least 436d, a background image E area 436e, a normal image F area 436f, and a normal image G area 436g.

The first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b store image data corresponding to images that are used relatively frequently among images in which image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident. It is an area, for example, two types of production modes of super reach variation effect (hereinafter, referred to as "super reach A" and "super reach B") and two types of production modes of advance notice effect. The image data corresponding to (hereinafter, referred to as "notice effect A" and "notice effect B") is stored in either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. .. In the following, these four types of images will be referred to as first priority images. Further, the image data corresponding to the first priority image is referred to as the first priority image data.

When the first priority image data of 1 is required for drawing an image and the first priority image data of 1 is not stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b. , MPU431 newly reads the first priority image data of the first priority image data from the character ROM 434 and transfers it to the image controller 437 so as to store it in either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. To send. At this time, the MPU 431 determines the transfer destination area so that the images are alternately stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b. Then, once stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b, the stored first priority image data is retained until the next first priority image data to be stored appears. To.

Further, when the first priority image data of 1 is required for drawing an image and the image data is already stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, MPU431 Does not newly read the first priority image data of the first priority image data from the character ROM 434, and uses the first priority image data already stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to draw an image.

As described above, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, but the frequently used image data is held in the normal video RAM 436 without being overwritten as much as possible. As such, the MPU 431 controls.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the relatively used first priority image data from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. In particular, the first priority image data stored in the two storage areas of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b includes "super reach A", "super reach B", and "notice effect". Since there are only four types, "A" and "notice effect B", rewriting of each area does not occur much. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

The second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are images that are relatively frequently used in accordance with the first priority image among the images in which the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident. It is an area for storing the image data corresponding to, for example, among the production modes of the super reach variation effect, three types of modes other than the first priority image (hereinafter, referred to as "super reach C" to "super reach E"). ), Three types of modes other than the first priority image (hereinafter, referred to as "notice effect C" to "notice effect E"), and a continuous advance notice effect effect mode. Image data corresponding to the "step-up type continuous notice effect" and the "same effect type continuous notice effect" are stored in either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. In the following, these eight types of images will be referred to as second priority images. Further, the image data corresponding to the second priority image is referred to as the second priority image data.

When the second priority image data of 1 is required for drawing an image, and the second priority image data of 1 is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d. , MPU431 newly reads the second priority image data of No. 1 from the character ROM 434 and gives a transfer command to the image controller 437 to store the second priority image data in either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. To send. At this time, the MPU 431 determines the transfer destination area so that the image data is stored alternately in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d in principle. Then, once stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the stored second priority image data is retained until the next second priority image data to be stored appears. To.

However, the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect is always retained even if the second priority image data to be stored next appears until it is displayed for the number of continuous advance notices set by the voice lamp control device 313. Will be done. Since the two types of continuous notice effects are not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the same time, the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d can be displayed at the same time. The image data to be used is not stored. Therefore, even if the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect is held in one of the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the other second priority image data can be rewritten in the other area. It is possible. That is, while one of the second priority image areas holds the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect, the image data to be stored next is continuously overwritten on the other second priority image area. Become.

Further, when the second priority image data of 1 is required for drawing an image and is already stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d of 1, the character ROM 434 The second priority image data of the first is not newly read from, and the second priority image data of the first which is already stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is used. , Draw an image.

As described above, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, but as much as possible, the second priority image data that is relatively used according to the first priority image data is also used. The MPU 431 controls so that it is held in the normal video RAM 436 without being overwritten.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second priority image data, which is relatively used in accordance with the first priority image data, from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

The background image E area 436e is a scroll range (from position b'shown in FIG. 31) that is not resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 when the stage is set to the "underwater stage" or the "empty stage". This is an area for storing the image data at position d). When the MPU 431 receives the background image change command from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 extracts the background image type included in the command. Then, when the type is the background B corresponding to the underwater stage or the background C corresponding to the empty stage, the image data resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is used in FIG. 31. While displaying the background image while scrolling between the indicated position a and the position b, the image data corresponding to the image between the position b'and the position d shown in FIG. 31 is input from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to transfer the background image E area 436e.

Then, once the transfer is completed, the image data stored in the background image E area 436e is retained until the next background image change command is received. As a result, the background corresponding to the underwater stage or the sky stage is stored in the image data resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the background image area 435e of the normal video RAM 436 until the stage is changed. Using the generated image data, the corresponding background image can be smoothly scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

The normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g are images other than the first priority image, the second priority image, and the background image among the images in which the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident, that is, the normal image. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to an image. When the normal image data, which is the data corresponding to the normal image, is required for drawing the image, the MPU 431 reads the normal image data from the character ROM 434 and either the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store the data. At this time, the MPU 431 determines the transfer destination area so that the writing to the normal image F area 436f and the writing to the normal image G area 436g are alternately performed. As a result, while the image data is being read from one normal image area where the writing of the image data is completed for image drawing, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is written to the other normal image area. Therefore, it is possible to reliably transfer the next image data to the normal image area by the time the next image data is required in the drawing process.

The drawn image data drawn by the image controller 437 is stored in the drawn image area (not shown) of the normal video RAM 436 as in the first embodiment, and the image controller 437 of the third symbol display device 281. By transmitting the drawn image data stored in the drawn image area of the normal video RAM 436 to the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display timing, the image corresponding to the drawn image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Will be done.

The ROM 432 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 431, and has at least an effect execution timetable storage area 432a.

The effect execution time table storage area 432a is an area in which the effect execution time table that describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for one effect is stored. This effect execution time table is prepared one by one for each effect mode. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set by the display variable effect pattern command, the effect execution time for the variable effect is As for the table, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the effect execution timetable will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect execution timetable. The effect execution time table defines the content (display content) of the image to be displayed at that time corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. For example, in the example of the effect execution timetable shown in FIG. 33, when the time is "0000H", that is, when the effect execution by this timetable is started, the "variation start" image is defined to be displayed, and the effect It is set so that the "notice effect A" image is displayed after the time "0080H" (about 2.5 seconds) after the execution is started, and after the time "0100H" (about 5 seconds) after the effect execution is started. It is set to display the "normal reach" image after seconds), and the "super reach B" image is set to be displayed after the time "0200H" (about 10 seconds) after the production execution is started. , It is defined that the "hit effect" image is displayed after the time "0600H" (about 30 seconds) after the effect execution is started.

When the MPU 431 receives a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 selects an effect execution timetable to be used, reads it from the effect execution timetable storage area 432a, and stores it in the work RAM 433 (. See S2403 in FIG. 51). Then, according to the time indicated by the display pointer, the display content corresponding to the time is specified from the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 (see S2515 in FIG. 52), and the display image corresponding to the display content is the third symbol. In order to display the image on the display device 281, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image (see S2516 in FIG. 52). Here, the display pointer is reset at the same time as the start of the effect in the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds, and is incremented by 1 each time the image drawing process is executed thereafter. By specifying the display content from the effect execution timetable according to the pointer, the image as defined by the effect execution timetable is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In addition, the effect execution timetable includes information regarding an image transfer command to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in advance. For example, in the effect execution timetable shown in FIG. 33, when the time is "0000H", that is, when the effect execution by this timetable is started, a transfer command of image data related to the "notice effect A" image is defined, and the effect is produced. The transfer command of the image data related to the "Super Reach B" image is specified after the time "0100" from the start of the execution, and the image data related to the "hit effect" image is specified after the time "0200" from the start of the effect execution. A transfer command is specified, and a transfer command for image data related to the "round effect" image is specified after a time "0600" from the start of the effect execution.

In the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 431 combines the display contents with the display contents when specifying the display contents corresponding to the time indicated by the display pointer from the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433. When the transfer command is specified, the transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to transfer the image data of the image to be transferred by the transfer command from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 (FIG. FIG. 52 (see S2518 and FIGS. 54 to 57).

Specifically, the MPU 431 sets the type of image to be transferred by the transfer command (“notice effect A”, “super reach B”, “hit effect”, “round effect”, etc.) as the transfer command. Judge from. The start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to each type is stored and the data size of the image data are stored in the program ROM corresponding to each image type, and are stored in the program ROM. Based on the information, the MPU 431 determines the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the image type to be transferred is stored and the data size of the image data. Further, the MPU 431 sets a normal video RAM 436 as the transfer destination video RAM, and further, the transfer destination is determined according to the image type to be transferred and the data storage status of each area provided in the normal video RAM 436. Set the area of. Then, the MPU 431 transfers the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the determined image data to be transferred is stored, the data size of the image data, the set transfer destination information (here, the normal video RAM 436), and the transfer. The start address of the destination area is included in the transfer command, and the transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437. Based on this transfer command, the image controller 437 reads the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 and stores the image data in the area designated by the transfer command.

In the example of the effect execution timetable shown in FIG. 33, the image data related to the “notice effect A” image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 456 by the transfer command defined for the time “0000H”, and then the time. According to the provision of "0080H", the "notice effect A" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Similarly, the image data relating to the "super reach B" image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 456 by the transfer instruction specified for the time "0100H", and then "super" by the specification of the time "0200H". The "reach B" image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As described above, in the effect execution timetable, since the transfer command is described so that the necessary image is transferred in advance before being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed is described. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the above, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 434 and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Therefore, it is possible to execute each effect while smoothly shifting each image specified in the effect execution timetable.

Further, the "variation start" image and the "normal reach" image can be drawn using the image data corresponding to the third symbol resident in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, since the transfer command for those images is unnecessary, the transfer command is not described in the effect execution timetable. As described above, depending on whether or not the effect execution timetable is described, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

The work RAM 433 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 431, and has an image display flag 433a at power-on, a continuous notice count counter 433b, and a continuous notice holding flag 433c. It has at least a first priority image storage flag 433d, a second priority image storage flag 433e, and a normal image storage flag 433f.

Whether or not the power-on image display flag 433a displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c) on the third symbol display device 281. It is a flag indicating. The power-on image display flag 433a causes the third symbol display device 281 to display the main image at power-on in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is set to ON in accordance with instructing the image controller 437 to draw the main image when the power is turned on (see S2305 in FIG. 50). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 281 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 435 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S2705 in FIG. 54 (b)).

The power-on image display flag 433a is referred to in the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds in the main process (see S2501 in FIG. 52), and the power-on image display flag 433a is on. In this case, the image drawing process at power-on is executed (see S2502 in FIG. 52) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the image display flag 433a at power-on is off. Is executed to draw various images so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 313.

Further, the image display flag 433a at power-on is referred to in the image transfer process repeatedly executed in the main process (see S2601 in FIG. 54 (a)), and the image display flag 433a at power-on is on. In this case, since the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 435 exists, the resident image transfer process for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed, and the image display flag at power-on is executed. When 433a is off, the normal image transfer process of transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is executed.

The continuous advance notice number counter 433b is a counter for counting the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect set for the variable effect, and the initial value is set to 0. Then, when a continuous notice setting command is received from the voice lamp control device 313, the number of continuous notices included in the continuous notice setting command (that is, the value of the continuous notice number register 423c of the voice lamp control device 313) is set to the continuous notice number counter 433b. Is set to. Further, when the variation effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is completed by the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), the update process of subtracting the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 433b by 1 is performed (S2522 in FIG. 52). As a result, the number of continuous notices is counted until the continuous notice number counter 433b becomes 0 again. The continuous notice number counter 433b is referred to when the continuous notice holding flag 433c, which will be described next, is set.

The continuous notice holding flag 433c is set while the continuous notice effect is continuously executed when the image data used in the continuous notice effect is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. This is a flag for controlling overwriting of the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in which the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is held. This flag is turned on when the transfer setting of the image data to be used in the continuous advance notice effect is set from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process (see S2904 in FIG. 56), and then continuously. It is turned off when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 433b, which is updated every time the variable effect for which the advance notice effect is set is executed, becomes 0 (see S2524 in FIG. 52).

Then, while the continuous notice holding flag 433c is turned on, another image data is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in which the image data used in the continuous notice effect is stored. Control is performed so that the data is not overwritten (see S3011 in FIG. 57).

When the first priority image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436, the first priority image storage flag 433d is stored in either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. A flag used to determine. That is, when the first priority image storage flag 433d is 0, it is determined to store the first priority image in the first priority image A area 436a, and when it is 1, the first priority image is stored in the first priority image B area 436b. Decide to store. Then, after the determination, the update process of the first priority image storage flag 433d is performed. That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are alternately selected as the storage destinations of the first priority image data.

When the second priority image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436, the second priority image storage flag 433e is stored in either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. A flag used to determine. That is, when the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, it is determined to store the second priority image in the second priority image C area 436c, and when it is 1, the second priority image is stored in the second priority image D area 436d. Decide to store. Then, after the determination, the update process of the second priority image storage flag 433e is performed. That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are alternately selected as the storage destinations of the second priority image data.

However, when the continuous notice holding flag 433c is 1, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is held in the second priority image area different from the area indicated by the second priority image update counter 433e before the update. Since overwriting of the area is restricted, the update process of the second priority image storage flag 433e is not executed. As a result, while the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is held, new image data is not overwritten in the second priority image area in which the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is held. While limiting, the second priority image area that does not hold the continuous preview image is repeatedly overwritten with image data.

The normal image storage flag 433f is used to determine whether to store the normal image in the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g when the normal image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436. .. That is, when the normal image storage flag 433f is 0, it is decided to store the normal image in the normal image F area 436f, and when it is 1, it is decided to store the normal image in the normal image G area 436g. Then, after the determination, the update process of the normal image storage flag 433f is performed. That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 1, the value is reset to 0. As a result, the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g are alternately selected as the storage destinations of the normal image data.

In addition, the work RAM 433 has various flags as flags (not shown). For example, the fluctuation start flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation display should be started receives a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the mode of the fluctuation effect or the continuous advance notice effect set by the voice lamp control device 313 from the voice lamp control device 313. This is turned on (see S2402 in FIG. 51), and turned off when the control for starting the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 281 (see S2510 in FIG. 52).

Further, the continuous advance notice execution flag indicating whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect in the variation display to be started is included in the display variation pattern command when it is instructed to execute the continuous advance notice effect by the display variation pattern command (that is, the display variation pattern command). When the continuous advance notice execution setting is set to "1" (see S2405 in FIG. 51) and the display variation pattern command is instructed not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the display variation pattern command is used). It is turned off when the included continuous advance notice execution setting is "0" (see S2406 in FIG. 51).

Further, the background image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the background image should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 indicates that the background image is changed by the voice lamp control device 313. When the background image change command to be changed is received from the voice lamp control device 313 and the background image type after the change is other than "city", that is, "underwater" or "sky" (see S2412 in FIG. 51). ), It is turned off when the transfer process of the image data corresponding to the background image is started by the background image transfer setting process (see S3101 in FIG. 58).

Further, the continuous advance notice image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is a continuous advance notice instructing the setting of the continuous advance notice effect by the voice lamp control device 313. It is turned on when a setting command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 (see S2416 in FIG. 51), and is turned off when the image data transfer process corresponding to the continuous notice effect is started by the continuous notice image transfer setting process. (See S2901 in FIG. 56).

Further, the image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable (see FIG. 33) should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is set in the effect execution timetable. When the drawing process is performed according to (see FIG. 33), if the information acquired from the effect execution timetable includes an image transfer command (see S2518 in FIG. 52), the image transfer command is turned on by the image transfer setting process. It is turned off when the transfer process of the image data corresponding to the designated transfer target image is started (see S3001 in FIG. 57).

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 40. The processing of the MPU 401 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first explained, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 310 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899, 9, 99, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 237 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 264 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 37, respectively.

After executing the start winning process, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 and the stop switch 251b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 310 instructs the launch control device 312 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the variation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 237.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not changing. (S1202: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 310) is larger than 0 (S1203). If the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is 0 (S1203: No), this process ends as it is. If the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is not 0 (S1203: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is subtracted by 1 (S1204), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area. Is shifted (S1205). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area to the execution area side in order. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1206). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1207). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 237 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time elapses. If not (S1207: No), the display of the first symbol display device 237 is updated (S1208).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 237 has elapsed (S1207: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1209). The stop symbol is set in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1206) described later with reference to FIG. 36. That is, by the processing of S1205, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variation jackpot to shift) or a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is lit when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a jackpot, a red LED is lit when a 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and a blue LED are lit when a time saving jackpot is reached. Turn on the LED. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1209, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 281 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 237. The command is set (S1210). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 313 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 314. The third symbol display device 281 stops the fluctuation when the fluctuation time elapses, and receives the stop command to end the fluctuation display of 1 in the third symbol display device 281.

Next, the fluctuation start processing (S1206) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S1206). This fluctuation start processing (S1206) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. A lottery (win / fail determination) of "big hit" or "missing" is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 200 is a normal low probability, "7,307,582" out of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes the winning value, and the pachinko machine 200 When the possible state (mode) is high probability, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596 , 618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is the winning value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these hit values, and if they match, it is determined that the hit is a big hit. ..

Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the display at the time of big hit is displayed based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Aspects are set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the 15R probability variation jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or the high probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. The display mode (lighting state of LED 237a) of the first symbol display device 237 is set based on whether the 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to the state or the time saving jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds Will be done. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is set. Of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "0, 1, 2, 3", the probability shifts to the low probability state (time saving jackpot) thereafter, and in the case of "4,5". After that, it shifts to the high probability state (2R probability variation jackpot), and in the case of "6,7,8,9", it shifts to the high probability state (15R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S1303). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. To. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that it is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. It is set whether the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is a reach that is out of front and back, a reach other than that of front and back, or a complete out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the detached symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1303, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

After the processing of S1303 or the processing of S1305 is completed, the fluctuation pattern command is set according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305 (S1306), and is set in the processing of S1302 or S1304. A stop symbol command is set according to the stopped symbol (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 41). To. Then, when the processing of S1307 is completed, the process returns to the variable processing.

Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 264, and if there is a starting winning. From the hold processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the values indicated by the various random number counters held, the permission determination process for starting the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 264 (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 264 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a (the hold count N of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 310) is the upper limit value. (In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (S1402). Then, if there is no winning in the first ball opening 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening 264, the number of pending balls N <4 (S1402: No). , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and the number of holds N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is added by 1. (S1403) Further, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is set to the first of the empty hold areas of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 403. Store in the area (S1404).

Then, in the processing of S1405 to S1410, the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is performed based on the values of the various random number counters stored in the processing of S1404. First, in the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S1404 (S1405).

Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot random number (hit value) indicated by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 match. Will be done. Here, as the jackpot random number table, as described above, a jackpot random number table for low probability and a jackpot random number table for high probability are prepared, and when the variable production is performed by the reserved ball held by the starting prize this time. Which jackpot random number table to use is determined based on the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 200 can take.

That is, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 200 is a normal low probability, the jackpot random number table for low probability is used, and "7,307,582" out of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 Is set as the winning value. In addition, at the time of high probability, the jackpot random number table for high probability is used, and "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486" is used. 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 863, 866, 892 "is set as the winning value. In the processing of S1405, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S1404 is compared with these hit values, and if they match, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S1405 (S1405: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S1404 is confirmed and set as the display mode at the time of the jackpot. Three types, that is, "15R probability variation jackpot" where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, "2R probability variation jackpot" where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds, and the maximum round It is determined whether or not the display mode at the time of the jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot" among the "time saving jackpots" in which the number shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds and the time is shortened during 100 fluctuations. (S1406). Here, as described above, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "6,7,8,9" out of the numerical values 0 to 9, it is determined as a 15R probability variation jackpot.

Then, when it is determined that the 15R probability variation jackpot is determined (S1406: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "73H" (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 27, in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111", is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "1", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "1".

In this way, in the case of a jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1", so that the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol. If it is displayed on the device 281, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player. Further, since the game status flag is set to "1" after the continuous advance notice, the voice lamp control device 313 sets the continuous advance notice determination probability for determining that the third symbol display device 281 is to start the continuous advance notice effect. As the table of, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 can be selected. In addition, the continuous advance notice post-game status flag allows the voice lamp control device 313 to determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect in consideration of the game state after the continuous advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit as a result of the processing of S1405 (S1405: No), then, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S1404, the display mode at the time of disconnection is the third. It is determined whether or not the effect to be displayed on the symbol display device 281 is a front-rear reach. (S1408). As described above, when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "98,99" out of the numerical values 0 to 99, it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. Then, when it is determined that the reach is out of front and back (S1408: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "72H" (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 27, in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111", is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "1", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "0".

In this way, even if the result of the lottery is off, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set when the display mode is a reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the big hit (front and back off reach). Since it is set to "1", if the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to give the player a high expectation until the variable display of the front-back deviation reach is completed. Further, since the game state flag is set to "0" after the continuous advance notice, the voice lamp control device 313 sets the continuous advance notice determination probability that determines the third symbol display device 281 to start the continuous advance notice effect. As the table of, the continuous notice determination table 422a1 at the time of disconnection can be selected.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the display mode at the time of jackpot is not a 15R probability variation jackpot (S1406: No), and as a result of the processing of S1408, the display mode at the time of deviation is not front-back deviation reach. If it is determined (S1408: No), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "70H" (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 27, in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111", is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "0", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "0". As a result, in such a case, the continuous notice effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is displayed, the display displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a result. The mode can always be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back off reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation given to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed.

Next, in the process of S1411, the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is set as the lower byte of the hold count command, the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the hold count command shown in FIG. 27 is generated in which the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value of "0111" and the lower byte is composed of the hold count N. The hold count command set by each process of S1407 to S1411 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 313 in the main process of the main control device 310. It is transmitted (see S1701 in FIG. 40).

In this way, the start winning process is executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310, and as a result of the lottery for the balls that have won the start winning in the main control device 310, the jackpot, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player ( Not only in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot), but also in the case of reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot (front and back out reach), a continuous notice effect is given to the voice lamp control device 313. The continuous notice permission flag that permits the continuous notice effect is included in the hold count command and transmitted. As a result, the voice lamp control device 313 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of the front-back disengagement reach, and the continuous advance notice effect can be executed under a wide variety of conditions. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player various feelings of expectation.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 403. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main control device 310. Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 403 (S1501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311, and the MPU 411 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a start-up process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 when the power is turned on to the main control device 310 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1611 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. 40, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 403. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 311 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 311 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 310 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 322. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403 is executed. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 403, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 403 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 311 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 413.

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 311. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 37) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 312.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 265 in the case of a big hit state. Mouth) A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing 265a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 265a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 265a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 283 The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 452. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the thirth time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S1706, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 311 and voice lamp control device 313). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1712), the access of the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 403.

The process of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 310, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 401 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 310 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. The processing of the MPU 421 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1916 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the power off command from the main control device 310 (see S1913 in FIG. 42), the voice lamp control device 313 executes the power off process of S1916. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1916 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1916. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 310) due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM423 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 423, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 423 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory of the RAM 423 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1916 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, the data of the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the data shifts to S1808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1916, the voice lamp control device 313. MPU 421 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 423 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 423, all the storage areas of the RAM 423 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 423 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified by the indicator lamp 234. The voice output device 426 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 314 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. It may be.

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1916 is executed (see S1915 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1916 is executed, the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S1916 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 313 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S1811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 423 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 310.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 310). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 423, S1809, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that when the processing of S1808 is reached via the processing of S1804 to S1806, the processing of S1804 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 423. When only the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 313 is saved. This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1901), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 to S1910. The process shifts to the process of S1911 without performing the process of. In the process of S1901, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S1902 to S1910 determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec), whereas S1911 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation display processing of S1912 and the command determination processing of S1912 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1912 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 310, and by executing the processing of S1911 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 234 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of S1908 described later. (S1902), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1903). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 426 or the lamp display device 427. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 281. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1904 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1904, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 281 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 314. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the value of the hold count counter 423a is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1906). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. For example, when the frame button 222 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the background image change command is transmitted to the display control device 314. By including information on the type of background image corresponding to the changed stage in this background image change command, the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the display control device 314 is changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 222, or the expectation for the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 222 during the reach production. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 222 may be used as a decision button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 222 is not arranged, the process of S1906 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1907). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring the input signal from the vibration sensor 428 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200.

Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether or not the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 42).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that the pachinko machine 200 has been vibrated, and the sound output device 426 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953). An error command notifying the occurrence of an error is transmitted to the display control device 314 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 42). As a result, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 281.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1908), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns of the illumination units 229 to 233 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 281. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the voice output device 426 or the like is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 281, and the sound is output from the voice output device 426 according to the setting. If the alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 43) (see S1953), the alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is voiced. It is output from the output device 426.

After the process of S1909, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1910), and the process proceeds to the process of S1911. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 281 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. The lamp editing process of S1908 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1909 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 281.

In the process of S1911, the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) and the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is set, and a command instructing the set mode is transmitted to the display control device 314. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. Then, after the variation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 310 is performed (S1912). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

When the processing of S1912 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 433 (S1913). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 310. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1913 (S1913: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1915), and the power-off process is executed (S1916). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1917), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427. It also erases the memory of the power outage information.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1913 (S1913: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1914), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1914: No), the process returns to the process of S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1914: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 200 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 is destroyed, the voice output device 426 or the lamp display device 427 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1912). This command determination process (S1912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and determines the command received from the main control device 310 as described above. .. In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 281 when the hold count command is received from the main control device 310.

In the command determination process, first, the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b and the continuous advance notice mode counter 423e used for determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect are updated (S2001). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is read from the RAM 423, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 423b. Further, the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is read from the RAM 423, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (15 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is stored in the continuous notice mode counter 423e.

In the process of S2002 following the process of S2001, the first command received from the main control unit 310 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and the variation pattern is read from the main control unit 310. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2002). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2002: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2003), and the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2004). Return to main processing. The fluctuation time extracted here is stored in the RAM 423 and is used when setting the mode of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 47) described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2002: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop symbol command has been received from the main control device 310 (S2005). Then, when it is determined that the stop symbol command has been received (S2005: Yes), the stop symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of line) is obtained from the stop symbol command. Is extracted, and based on the extracted stop symbol and the value of each counter, the stop symbol to be actually displayed after the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 281 is set, and the information regarding the set stop symbol is displayed. After generating the display stop symbol command including the display stop symbol command, the display stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control device 314 (SS2006).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop symbol command has not been received (S2005: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold count command (see FIG. 27) has been received from the main controller 310 (S2007). In the discrimination process in S2007, if the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte of the command received from the main control device 310 are "0111" (binary number), the hold count command is received from the main control device 310. Judge. Then, when it is determined that the hold count command has been received (S2007: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main controller 310 stored in the lower byte of the hold count command (that is, the hold count command is held by the main controller 310). The number of hold times of the variable effect) is extracted and stored in the hold number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 (S2008).

Here, since the hold count command is transmitted from the main control device 310 when the ball wins the first ball opening 264 (starting prize), each time there is a starting winning, the process of S2008 The value of the hold count counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 can be adjusted to the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, even if the value of the hold count counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 deviates from the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like, the hold count of the voice lamp control device 313 when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the counter 423a can be modified to match the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main controller 310.

After the process of S2008, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. By this continuous advance notice determination process, when the main control device 310 notifies the permission of the continuous advance notice effect by the hold count command, it is determined whether or not to actually start the continuous advance notice effect. Details of this continuous notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2007 (S2007: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S2010), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 313, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is used by the display control device 314, the command is displayed and controlled. It is transmitted to the device 314.

Next, the continuous advance notice determination process (S2009) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this continuous advance notice determination process (S2009). This continuous advance notice determination process (S2009) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, the main control device 310 is executed by the hold count command. When the permission of the continuous advance notice effect is notified from, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is actually started.

In the continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2101), and when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 (S2101: No). Since the execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set, the subsequent processing is omitted and the continuous notice determination process is terminated. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed for at least a part of the pending variable effect, the value of the continuous advance notice permission flag included in the received hold count command is "1". However, it is possible to prevent a continuous advance notice effect from being newly set for the variable effect, and it is possible to easily prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being duplicately set as the variable effect. Further, since it is possible to suppress that another continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed after one continuous advance notice effect is performed, the appearance frequency of the continuous advance notice effect can be suppressed, and the player can be informed. It is possible to keep high expectations for continuous notice production.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 0 as a result of the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), then the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (see FIG. 27), that is, If it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice permission flag is 1 (S2102) and if it is determined that the continuous advance notice permission flag is not 1 (that is, 0) (S2101: No), the main control device 310 performs the continuous advance notice effect. Since it is determined that there is no such process, the subsequent processing is omitted and the continuous notice determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice permission flag is 1 (S2102: Yes), it is determined that the main control device 310 permits the continuous advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously processed in the subsequent processes after S2103. Decide whether or not to start the advance notice production.

First, in the processing of S2103 to S2105, the continuous advance notice determination used to determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect from the two continuous advance notice determination tables 422a (the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 422a1 or the missed continuous advance notice determination table 422a2). Select a table (see Figure 28).

In the processing of S2103, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (see FIG. 27), that is, the game state flag after continuous advance notice is 1, and if it is 1, (S2103: Yes). Since the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is a big hit, the big hit continuous advance notice determination table 422a1 is selected as the continuous advance notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect (S2104). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state flag after the continuous notice is not 1 (that is, 0) (S2103: No), the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is out of order, so that the continuous notice determination table to be used is used. , Select the continuous notice determination table 422a2 at the time of disconnection (S2105).

When the continuous notice judgment table is selected by the processing of S2103 to S2105, the value of the hold count counter 423a (the value of the hold count counter 423a from the selected continuous notice judgment table (big hit continuous notice judgment table 422a1 or loss continuous notice judgment table 422a2). That is, the continuous notice determination range associated with the number of times the fluctuation effect is held in the main control device 310) is specified, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 423b (S2106). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is started (S2107).

As a result, when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is not included in the continuous advance notice determination range and the continuous advance notice effect is not started (S2107: No), the processing after S2108 is skipped and the continuous advance notice determination process is performed. finish. That is, since the setting of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is held as it is at 0, the continuous advance notice effect can be set not to be executed in the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later (see S2252 in FIG. 48).

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 423b is included in the continuous advance notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started (S2107: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 423a is set in the continuous advance notice number register 423c (S2107: Yes). S2108), and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is set to "1" (S2109). By setting the value of the hold count counter 423a in the continuous advance notice number register 423c in the process of S2108, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at the time when the continuous notice effect is determined. , The number of times the continuous notice effect is executed can be specified.

Further, since the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is set to "1" in the process of S2109, the third symbol display device 281 is used while the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d shows a value other than 0. In order to perform the continuous advance notice effect, the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect can be determined in the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Then, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed, which is defined by the continuous notice number register 423c, each time the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined for the variable effect of 1. It is incremented by 1 until it becomes, and is reset to 0 when it is equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c. Therefore, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is started, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed defined by the continuous advance notice number register 423c, that is, all the variable effects held at the time of determining the continuous advance notice effect are continuously performed. The effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect is determined so that the advance notice effect is executed.

In the processing of S2110 to S2112 following the processing of S2109, the production mode of the continuous advance notice effect whose start is determined by the branch of S2107: Yes is determined. First, in the process of S2110, the value of the continuous advance notice mode counter 423e is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value is in the range of 3 to 7 (S2110). Then, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is in the range of 3 to 7 (S2110: Yes), the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set to "1" (S2111). As a result, the same effect type continuous advance notice effect is set as the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and in the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later, "bubbles" are generated after the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is stopped. Is set to be displayed.

Further, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is not in the range of 3 to 7 as a result of the processing of S2110 (S2110: No), the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set to "0" (S2113). As a result, a step-up type continuous advance notice effect is set as an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and each time a variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is set is performed in the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later, Images of any of "eggs", "chicks", "chickens", and "chicken groups" are set to be displayed in a predetermined order.

When the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set by the process of S2111 or S2112, the continuous notice setting command is then transmitted to the display control device 314 (S2113) to end the continuous notice determination process.

Here, the details of the continuous notice setting command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the bit configuration of the continuous advance notice setting command.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the continuous advance notice setting command, the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value "0001" (binary number), whereby this command is a continuous advance notice setting command. Indicates that. The display control device 314 confirms the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte among the commands received from the voice lamp control device 313, and receives the command when the value is "0001" (binary number). Recognize that the command is a continuous notice setting command (see S2413 in FIG. 51).

Further, among the continuous notice setting commands, the lower byte is composed of the number of continuous notices. When transmitting the continuous notice setting command to the display control device 314, the voice lamp control device 313 sets the value of the continuous notice number register set by the process of S2108 (see FIG. 45), that is, the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed. It is applied to the 2nd to 0th bits of the lower byte of the continuous notice setting command. Further, 0 is set in all the 7th to 3rd bits of the lower byte of the continuous advance notice setting command. As a result, the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed (the number of continuous notices) can be represented by the entire lower byte of the continuous notice setting command, and when the voice lamp control device 313 determines the continuous notice effect, the display control device 314 Can be notified of the number of consecutive notices.

Further, in the continuous notice setting command, the 0th bit of the high-order byte is composed of the continuous notice type. When the voice lamp control device 313 transmits the continuous notice setting command to the display control device 314, the continuous notice setting command sets the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f set by the processing of S2111 or S2112 (see FIG. 45). It is applied to the 0th bit of the high-order byte of. As a result, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command, that is, the value of the continuous notice type is "0", the effect mode of the continuous notice effect determined by the voice lamp control device 313 is a step-up type. If the value of the continuous advance notice type is "1", it is possible to notify the display control device 314 that the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect determined by the voice lamp control device 313 is the same effect type.

Therefore, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice setting command from the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 grasps the number of continuous notices to be executed from now on and the mode of the continuous notice effect from the continuous notice setting command. Can be done. Then, the image data necessary for drawing the continuous advance notice effect can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in advance according to the grasped mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and usually according to the grasped number of continuous advance notice effects. To execute control to hold the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect transferred to the video RAM 436 for normal use video RAM 436 until the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the number of times indicated by the number of continuous advance notices. Can be done.

The third to first bits of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command are unused bits, and in the present embodiment, arbitrary values are set for these bits to generate the continuous notice setting command. Will be done. However, each of these bits may be fixed at 0 or 1.

Next, the variation display process (S1911) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1911). This variation display process (S1911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313, and as described above, the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 310. In this case, the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 is set, and a command instructing the set mode is transmitted to the display control device 314.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is on (S2201). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 310, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2202), and then the continuous notice setting process is executed (S2203).

Here, the continuous notice setting process (S2203) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice setting process (S2203) executed by the MPU 421 in the voice lamp control device 313. In this continuous advance notice setting process, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 310 and the variation effect is started, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is set to a value other than 0, the variation effect is set. On the other hand, it is a process of setting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect so that the continuous notice effect is performed.

In this continuous notice setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2251), and if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2251: Yes), the continuous notice is given. The effect is set to not executed (S2252), and the process proceeds to S2263. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is set not to be executed for the variation effect set in response to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310. After that, the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is updated (S2663), and the process returns to the variable display process. Since the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is held at 0 in the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d by the process of S2263.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2251, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 (S2251: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice mode flag 423f is 1 (S2253). If the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f is 1 (S2253: Yes), the continuous notice effect is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 45). .. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2254), and when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2254). S2254: No), "foam" is set as the mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2255), and the process proceeds to S2263. As a result, for the variation effect set in response to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, "bubbles" are set to be displayed as a continuous advance notice effect after the variation effect is stopped.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2254, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2254: Yes), the continuous notice effect is set to not executed (S2252), and S2263 Move to the processing of.

Here, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the setting process of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is set for the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Means when is done. The continuous advance notice effect is an effect of notifying the lottery result in the final variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, and the continuous advance notice effect of the same effect type produces "bubbles" after the variable effect is stopped. Since it is an effect mode to be displayed, it is meaningless to display "bubbles" after the stop of the variation effect for the last variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the present embodiment, when the continuous notice mode flag is "1", that is, when the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is set to the same effect type (S2253: Yes), the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is the continuous notice number register. If it is equal to the value of 423c (S2254: Yes), the continuous advance notice effect is set to not executed (S2252). Therefore, for the last variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, after the variation effect is stopped. It is possible to prevent "bubbles" from being displayed.

On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f is not 1 as a result of the processing of S2253, that is, if it is 0 (S2253: No), the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. Up-type continuous notice production is set. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to or not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2256), and if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2256). S2256: Yes), a "chicken group" is set as an effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2257), and the process proceeds to S2263.

As described above, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c, the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect is set with respect to the final variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Since it means that the setting process is performed, it is set so that the "chicken group" is displayed as a continuous notice effect during the variation effect for the variation effect. Therefore, if a continuous advance notice effect is performed during the variable effect effect and a "chicken group" is displayed in the continuous advance notice effect, the player expects a big hit after the change in the display of the "chicken group". Can be held in.

Further, as a result, even when the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c is 3 or less, that is, the number of variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3 or less, the continuous advance notice effect is set regardless of the number of continuous advance notice executions. The "chicken group" can be displayed in the final variation effect. Therefore, when the number of variable effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is suddenly displayed. Therefore, the player looks at the suddenly displayed chicken group. , It is possible to have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production in which the chicken group is displayed.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2256, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2256: No), then whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 1. Determine (S2258). Then, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 1 (S2258: Yes), "egg" is set as the effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2259), and the process proceeds to S2263. As a result, when a step-up type continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect set in response to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the first continuous advance notice effect, It is set so that "egg" is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

Further, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not 1 (S2258: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 2 (S2260). Then, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 2 (S2260: Yes), “chick” is set as the effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2661), and the process proceeds to S2263. As a result, when a step-up type continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect set in response to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the second continuous advance notice effect, It is set so that "chick" is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

Further, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not 2 (S2260: No), it can be determined that the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 3. This is because the maximum number of executions for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is 4, which is the maximum number of hold times for the variable effect that can be held by the main control device 310. Therefore, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 4. This is because it is always determined in the process of S2256 that the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c. Therefore, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c and is neither 1 nor 2 (S2256: No, S2258: No, S2260: No), the continuous notice number counter 423d It can be determined that the value is 3. Therefore, in this case, "chicken" is set as the effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2262), and the process proceeds to S2663. As a result, when a step-up type continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect set in response to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the third continuous advance notice effect, It is set so that "chicken" is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

In the process of S2263, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is updated (S2663). In this update process, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d before the update is 0, 0 is held as it is. If the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d before the update is other than 0 and is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is incremented by 1 and the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d before the update is increased. If is other than 0 and is equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is reset to 0. As a result, the mode of the continuous advance notice effect is set so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed the number of executions specified by the continuous advance notice number register 423c.

Here, as described above, the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c is the value of the hold number counter 423a at the time when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, that is, is held by the main control device 110 at that time. This is the number of times the variable effect is held. Therefore, by performing the update processing of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d as described above, the continuous advance notice effect is generated for all the variable effects held in the main control device 110 when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. The mode is set, and the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, since the determination of the continuous advance notice effect is made based on the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous advance notice effect through the continuous advance notice effect. it can.

When the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d by S2263 is completed, the continuous notice setting process ends. Then, the process returns to the variable display process.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description of the variable display process will be continued. When the continuous advance notice setting process by the process of S2203 is completed, then, the variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2204). Then, from the variously prepared variation effect modes (variation effect modes), one variation effect mode is set among the variation effect modes that can correspond to the variation time acquired by the processing of S2204 (S2205). ).

After that, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the setting of the continuous advance notice effect performed by the process of S2203 and the setting of the variation effect mode performed by the process of S2205, and the generated display variation pattern command is displayed and controlled. It is transmitted to the device 314 (S2206).

Here, the details of the display variation pattern command will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the bit configuration of the display variation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the display variation pattern command, the 7th to 4th bits of the high-order byte are composed of a fixed value "0011" (binary number), whereby this command is displayed variation. Indicates that it is a pattern command. The display control device 314 confirms the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the high-order byte among the commands received from the voice lamp control device 313, and receives the command when the value is "0011" (binary number). Recognize that the command is a display variation pattern command (see S2401 in FIG. 51).

In addition, among the display fluctuation pattern commands, the lower byte represents "variation pattern setting". The voice lamp control device 313 uniquely indicates a code that uniquely indicates the variation effect mode set by the process of S2205 of the variation display process (see FIG. 47), which is a lower byte of this display variation pattern command, that is, "variation pattern setting". Insert in.

Further, the third bit of the upper byte of the display fluctuation pattern command represents "continuous notice execution setting", and if the value is "0", the continuous notice is given in the fluctuation effect set by this display fluctuation pattern command. It indicates that the effect is not executed, and if the value is "1", it indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command.

Further, the second to 0th bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command represent a "continuous notice mode", and if the value is "0", the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command. Indicates that the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect executed in is "bubble", and if the value is "1", the continuous advance notice effect executed in the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command If the effect mode is "tamago" and the value is "2", the effect mode of the continuous notice effect executed in the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command is "chick". If the value is "3", it means that the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command is "chicken", and the value is "chicken". If it is "4", it means that the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the variation effect set by the display variation pattern command is "chicken group".

The voice lamp control device 313 sets the "continuous notice execution setting" to "0" when the continuous notice effect is set not to be executed by the continuous notice display process (see FIG. 48) of S2203. In this case, the "continuous notice mode" is set to an arbitrary value. In this case, the setting of the "continuous notice mode" may be fixed to "0", or may be fixed to another value.

Further, when the continuous notice effect mode is set to "bubble" by the continuous notice display process of S2203 (see FIG. 48), the "continuous notice execution setting" is set to "1" and the "continuous notice mode" is set. When "0" is set and the continuous notice effect mode is set to "egg", the "continuous notice execution setting" is set to "1" and the "continuous notice mode" is set to "1" to be continuous. When the notice effect mode is set to "chick", the "continuous notice execution setting" is set to "1", the "continuous notice mode" is set to "2", and the continuous notice effect mode is set to "chicken". If set, "Continuous notice execution setting" is set to "1", "Continuous notice mode" is set to "3", and if the continuous notice effect mode is set to "Chicken group", "Continuous" The "notice execution setting" is set to "1", and the "continuous notice mode" is set to "4".

When the display control device 314 receives this display variation pattern command, it processes the third symbol display device 218 so that the variation effect is performed, and also performs the "continuous notice execution setting" (upper level) of the display variation pattern command. If the value of the third bit of the byte) is "1", processing is performed so that the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the variable effect (see S2402 to S2406 in FIG. 51). Further, in the display control device 313, the variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 based on the "continuous advance notice execution setting", the "continuous advance notice mode", and the "variation pattern setting" indicated by the display variation pattern command. The variation effect pattern is determined, an effect execution timetable corresponding to the variation effect pattern is selected from the effect execution timetable storage area 432a, and the selected effect execution timetable is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2403 in FIG. 51). reference). As a result, in the third symbol display device 218, the variation effect is performed according to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description of the variable display process will be continued. After transmitting the display fluctuation pattern command to the display control device 314 by the processing of S2206, the value of the hold count counter 423a is decremented by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the hold ball (completion of the setting of the change display corresponding to the hold ball). (S2207), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 58. The processing of the MPU 431 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and an external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 313. In the external interrupt processing, the received commands are sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433. This command buffer area is composed of a FIFA type ring buffer, and the command stored in the command buffer area by the external interrupt process is used in the command determination process (see S2408 and FIG. 51 in FIG. 50) executed in the main process. , Reads in the order in which they are stored, and executes processing according to each command. On the other hand, the main process executes the initialization process at the time of turning on the power and the main process of the display control device 314.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the main process executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. This main process is started by the MPU 431 when the power is turned on, and first, the initial setting process accompanying the power on is executed (S2301). Specifically, the MPU 431 is initially set, and processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 433, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 is performed.

Next, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 (S2302). In this transfer command, the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435) are included. , The start address of the main image area 435a at power-on, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 according to this transfer command. When the power is turned on, the data is transferred to the main image area 435a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer command is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 431. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer command has been completed. When the image controller 437 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer command, the image controller 437 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 437 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 431 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 437 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer command transmitted to the image controller 437 by the process of S2302, then the power-on variable image A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 435b when the power of the resident video RAM 435 is turned on (S2303). In this transfer command, the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 435b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 according to this transfer command. It is transferred to the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 435b is completed based on the transfer command transmitted to the image controller 437 by the process of S2303, the image controller 434 is then powered. Instructs the drawing of the main image at the time of input (S2304). Specifically, the address of the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 in which the main image at power-on is stored is specified, and drawing is executed using the image data stored at that address. Instruct the image controller 434. The image controller 434 draws an image using the image data stored at the address specified by the drawing instruction according to the drawing instruction from the MPU 431. Then, the drawn image data obtained by drawing is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 436, and the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing. As a result, by the processing of S2304, the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. At this time, since the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is already stored in the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435, the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed. Even in this case, the main image when the power is turned on can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Next, the image display flag 433a is turned on when the power is turned on (S2305). As a result, in the image transfer command processing (see S2309) described later, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 434 so as to transfer all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Image transfer command processing is executed (see S2602 in FIG. 54). Further, the image display flag 433a at power-on is changed from the character ROM 434 of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 to the resident video RAM 435 based on the transfer command to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer command processing. It stays on until the transfer is complete. As a result, during that time, in the image drawing process (see S2307) described later, the image at the time of image input (main image at the time of image input and the variable image at the time of image input) shown in FIG. 30 is drawn on the image controller 434 so as to be drawn. Instructions are given.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 434 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 281 is started without any problem by power-on. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, after the power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 together with the main image at power-on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 281, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 264, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 310. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 313, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 434 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in this pachinko machine 200, since it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored immediately after the power is turned on. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2305, the processing of S2305 or the processing of S2307 is started in order to execute the image drawing processing (see S2307), which is the drawing processing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, every 20 ms. It is confirmed whether or not 20 msec or more has passed since (S2306), and if 20 msec or more has passed (S2306: Yes), the image drawing process is executed (S2307), and then the process proceeds to S2408. To do. The details of the image drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. Further, as a result of the processing of S2306, if 20 seconds or more have not passed (S2306: Yes), the image drawing processing of S2307 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2308.

In the processing of S2308, the contents of the commands received from the voice lamp control device 313 and stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 by the external interrupt processing are received from the command buffer area in the order of storage (received by the voice lamp control device 313). The command judgment process is executed by reading and judging in the order in which it was executed) and executing the process according to the command. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, an image transfer command process for transmitting a transfer command to the image controller 434 is executed so that the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 (S2309). By the transfer command transmitted by this image transfer command process, the image controller 437 reads the desired image data from the character ROM 434 and transfers it to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. The details of this image transfer command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (a).

When the process of S2309 is completed, the process returns to the process of S2306. Then, the processes of S2306 to S22309 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

In the process of S2306, it is a process related to drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by S2307 to determine whether or not 20 msec has elapsed, and it is necessary to perform the process in a short cycle (within 20 msec). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2308 and the image transfer command process of S2309 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2308 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 313, and by executing the processing of S2309 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination process. Based on the command, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 434 to each video RAM 435 and 436 can be performed without delay.

Next, the command determination process (S2308) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2308). This command determination process (S2308) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and stores the commands stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 by the external interrupt process. Read in the order in which they were issued, and execute the process according to each command.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433, the command stored first is read from the command buffer area, and the read command is a display variation pattern command. It is determined whether or not (see FIG. 49) (S2401). Here, when the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte of the command read from the command buffer area is "0011", it is determined that the command is a display variation pattern command.

If it is a display variation pattern command (S2401: Yes), first, the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is turned on in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the command buffer area 433 of the work RAM 433. (S2402). As a result, the MPU 431 controls the image drawing process so that the third symbol display device 281 starts the variation effect in the image drawing process (S2308) described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, based on the contents of the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49), the effect execution timetable used in the current variation effect is selected from the plurality of effect execution timetables stored in the effect execution timetable storage area 432a. Is selected and stored in the work RAM (S2403). Here, the continuous advance notice effect is produced by the information of the "variation pattern setting" indicated by the lower byte of the display variation pattern command and the "continuous advance notice execution setting" indicated by the third bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command. When executing, based on the information of the "continuous notice mode" indicated by the 2nd to 0th bits of the upper byte of the command, the effect pattern of the variation effect to be executed based on the display variation pattern command is executed. to decide. Then, in the effect execution timetable storage area 432a, an effect execution timetable is prepared for each effect pattern of the variable effect, so that the effect execution timetable corresponding to the effect pattern of the variable effect determined here can be obtained. Select and store in work RAM.

Then, when the MPU 431 performs the drawing process of the variable effect in the image drawing process described later with reference to FIG. 52, the MPU 431 is set every predetermined time (20 milliseconds) according to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM. The drawing process of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is executed. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 33, the effect execution timetable includes a command for transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and the MPU 431 sends the image controller to the image controller in accordance with the transfer command. A transfer command for image data is transmitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution setting indicated by the third bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is 1 (S2404), and if it is 1, (S2404: Yes), based on the display variation pattern command. Since the continuous advance notice effect is set to be executed in the variable effect to be performed, the continuous advance notice execution flag provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on (S2405), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Further, if the continuous advance notice execution setting is not 1, that is, 0 (S2404: No), the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the variation effect performed based on the display variation pattern command. The continuous advance notice execution flag provided in the RAM 433 is turned off (S2406), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

By setting the continuous advance notice execution flag in this way, the MPU 431 counts the number of executions each time the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Then, the MPU 431 is used normally from the character ROM 434 in advance based on the reception of the continuous advance notice setting command while the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the number of continuous advance notice effects indicated by the continuous advance notice setting command received in advance from the voice lamp control device 313. Control is performed so that the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect transferred to the video RAM 436 is not overwritten.

As a result of the processing of S2401, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a display variation pattern command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is a display stop symbol command (S2407). .. Then, if it is a display stop symbol command (S2407: Yes), the stop symbol of the variable effect indicated by the display stop symbol command is displayed in the effect execution timetable selected by the process of S2403 and stored in the work RAM. Addition (S2408), end the command determination process, and return to the main process. As a result, the MPU 431 draws the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command as the stop symbol of the variable effect by performing the image drawing process according to the effect execution timetable to which the stop symbol is added, and draws the stop symbol. It can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As a result of the processing of S2407, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a display stop symbol command (S2407: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is a background image change command (S2409). If it is a background image change command (S2409: Yes), first, the background image type included in the background image change command is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2410). As a result, the MPU 431 changes the background image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

Here, when the background image type is "city" (background A), the image data corresponding to the background A is stored in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 over the entire scrolled range. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured with the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, when the background image type is changed to "city" (background A) by the background image change command, the background A is immediately changed to the third symbol. The display device 281 can be scrolled. In addition, the image data of the background B and the background C corresponding to the background image types "underwater" and "sky" are also positioned from the initial positions (positions a in FIGS. 31B and 31C) displayed after the background image is changed. Since the image data in the predetermined range (positions a to b in FIGS. 31B and 31C) including a') is stored in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the reading speed of the character ROM 434 is read. Even if it is configured with the slow NAND flash memory 434a, when the background image type is changed to "underwater" (background B) or "sky" (background C) by the background image change command, the background B or The initial position of the background C can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and can be scrolled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background image type indicated in the background image change command is "in the city" (background A) (S2411), and if it is "in the city" (background A) (S2411: Yes), the command determination process is performed. And return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is not "in the city" (background A), that is, if it is "underwater" (background B) or "sky" (background C) (S2411: No), the background image transfer start flag is turned on (S2412). ), Ends the command judgment process and returns to the main process. As a result, the MPU 431 has the background of the resident video RAM 435 among the image data corresponding to "underwater" (background B) or "sky" (background C) by the background image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG. 58. The image data including the scroll range not stored in the image area 435c (positions d from position b'in FIGS. 31B and 31C) is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436. The image controller 437 is controlled in this way.

Here, while the range from position a to position b in FIGS. 31B and 31C is scrolled from left to right, the image data corresponding to the image from position b'to position d is displayed as a character. Since the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer from the ROM 434 to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436 can be completed, the position is set while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. The image data at the position d from b'can be transferred to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 236. Therefore, after scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, the background stored in the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the image, the range from the position b'to the position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

As a result of the processing of S2409, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a background image change command (S2409: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is a continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46). (S2413). Here, when the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte of the command read from the command buffer area is "0001", it is determined that the command is a continuous advance notice setting command.

If it is a continuous notice setting command (S2413: Yes), first, the "continuous notice number" indicated by the lower byte of the continuous notice setting command is stored in the continuous notice number counter 433b (S2414). As a result, it is possible to count the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed each time the variation effect set to execute the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the reception of the display variation pattern command.

Next, the "continuous notice type" ("0 (step-up type)" or "1 (same effect type)") indicated by the 0th bit of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2415). The continuous advance notice image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 is set to on (S2416), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the MPU 431 can be "tamago", "chick", and "chicken" if the "continuous notice type" is "0 (step-up type)" by the continuous notice image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG. 56. , "Chicken group", the required image data is determined according to the "continuous notice count" stored in the continuous notice count counter 433b, and the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. The image controller 437 is controlled in this way. If the "continuous notice type" is "1 (same effect type)", the image controller 437 is controlled so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the "bubble" from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

The continuous notice setting command is transmitted to the display control device 314 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 313, and instructs the start of the variable effect set to execute the continuous notice effect. It is sent before the display variation pattern command to be displayed. Then, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous advance notice setting command, the display control device 314 controls the image controller 437 so as to transfer the image data necessary for the continuous advance notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. At the stage of performing the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect, the image data required for the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the continuous advance notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 without delay.

As a result of the processing of S2413, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a continuous notice setting command (S2413: No), then it is determined whether or not the command is an error command (S2417). If it is an error command, the error type included in the error command is stored in the work RAM 433, the error flag is turned on (S2418), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

As a result, the MPU 431 performs image drawing processing so that the error message image corresponding to the error type stored in the work RAM 433 is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Here, the error message image is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, but the image data corresponding to the error message image is resident. Since it is stored in the error message image area 435f of the video RAM 435 for use, the MPU 431 reads the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 in advance based on the received error command. , Each error message image can be drawn immediately by the image controller 437. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the successive error messages from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 434, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed in.

As a result of the processing of S2417, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not an error command (S2417: No), then the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S2419), and the command determination processing is completed. Then, return to the main process. For example, if the read command is a stop command, the stop flag for instructing the stop of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on. As a result, the MPU 431 executes the process of stopping the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 281.

Next, the image drawing process (S2307) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the image drawing process (S2307). This image drawing process (S2307) is executed every 20 ms in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and is an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Instruct the image controller 437 to draw.

In this image drawing process, first, it is determined whether or not the image display flag 433a at power-on is on (S2501), and if it is on (S2501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435. Since the transfer has not been completed, the image drawing process is executed when the power is turned on (S2502), the image drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the image drawing process (S2502) at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an image drawing process (S2502) at power-on executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. This power-on image drawing process is a process for displaying the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image as the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281.

In the power-on image drawing process, first, it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 281 is fluctuating (S2551), and if it is not fluctuating (S2551: No), then The third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 determines whether or not the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is on (S2552). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2553), the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 is used to draw the power-on main image. Instruct the image controller (S2555) to end the image drawing process when the power is turned on. As a result, the third symbol display device 281 displays the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30 (a).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S2552: Yes) as a result of the processing of S2552, the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2554), and the main image area 435a at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 are turned on. Using the image data resident in the area 435b, the image controller is instructed to draw the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (S2555), and the image drawing process at power-on ends.

Further, if the result of the processing of S2551 is changing (S2551: Yes), then whether the stop flag for instructing the stop of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is on. Whether or not it is determined (S2556). If the stop flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2556: No), the process proceeds to S2555 and resides in the resident video RAM 435 in the main image area 435a when the power is turned on and the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on. Using the generated image data, the image controller is instructed to draw the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (S2555), and the image drawing process at power-on ends.

Here, as the symbol of the fluctuating image when the power is turned on to be drawn, the “◯” symbol shown in FIG. 30 (b) and the “x” symbol shown in FIG. 30 (c) are alternately set with the passage of time. The image controller is instructed to draw a variable image at power-on corresponding to the set symbol. As a result, during the fluctuation, the power-on fluctuation image shown in FIG. 30B and the power-on fluctuation image shown in FIG. 30C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. After the fluctuation time specified by the display variation pattern command has elapsed, based on the stop symbol specified by the display stop symbol command, if the stop symbol is a hit, the "○" symbol shown in FIG. 30 (b) If the drawing of the variable image at power-on is instructed and the stop symbol is off, the drawing of the variable image at power-on of the “x” symbol shown in FIG. 30 (b) is instructed. As a result, after the lapse of the fluctuation time, the lottery result (whether or not it is a big hit) performed by the main control device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol.

On the other hand, if the stop flag is on (S2556: Yes) as a result of the processing of S2556, the stop flag is first turned off (S2557), and then the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the main image area 435a when the power is turned on. Using the image data, the image controller is instructed to draw the main image at power-on (S2558), and the image drawing process at power-on ends. As a result, after the variation effect is stopped, the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In this way, by executing the image drawing process when the power is turned on, the third symbol is displayed until the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is completed. An image at power-on is displayed on the display device 281. As a result, while the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 314. Can be done. Further, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 281 is started without any problem by power-on. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, since the player started the game while the main image at power-on was displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the start instruction of the variation effect was issued from the main control device 310 via the voice lamp control device 313. If so, the fluctuation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C can be immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind even while the main image is displayed for a while when the power is turned on.

Returning to FIG. 52, the description of the image drawing process will be continued. If the image display flag at power-on is turned off by the process of S2501 (S2501: No), it means that all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Next, it is determined whether or not the error flag provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2503). Then, if the error flag is off (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2506. If the error flag is on (S2503: Yes), it means that an error command has been received from the voice lamp control device 313. Therefore, first, the error type stored in the work RAM 433 is read and set to the error type. The drawing of the corresponding error message image is set (S2504), then the error flag is turned off (S2505), and the process proceeds to S2506.

As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw an error message image according to the error type using the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 by the process of S2527 described later. To.

As described above, the error message image is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. However, the display control device 314 issues an error command. When it is received, the drawing process of the error message image corresponding to the error type is executed by using the image data resident in the error message image image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 in advance. , The error message image can be displayed without delay from the occurrence of the error.

In the process of S2506, it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 281 is a big hit (S2506), and if it is a big hit, the drawing of the big hit effect is set (S2507). The process proceeds to S2506.

As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image of the jackpot effect by the process of S2527 described later. Here, the image data used for the jackpot effect is transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the "hit effect transfer command" (see FIG. 33) described in the effect execution timetable used for the variable effect. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the processing of S2527, by instructing the image controller 437 to draw the jackpot effect using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 by this "hit effect transfer command", the reading speed of the character ROM 434 is increased. Even if the slow NAND flash memory 434a is used, the jackpot effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2506 that the jackpot is not in progress (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 281 is changing (S2508). .. Then, if it is not changing (S2508: No), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag for permitting the start of the fluctuation effect is turned on in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433. (S2509). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S2509: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2510), and the display pointer provided in the work RAM 433 is reset to 0 (S2511). As a result, the display of the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281 is started according to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

Further, the value of the continuous advance notice execution flag set by the process of S2405 or S2406 of the command determination process is stored in the continuous advance notice execution flag of the work RAM 433 (S2512), and the process proceeds to the process of S2514. As a result, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the change effect that is started based on the change start flag being turned on is indicated by the continuous advance notice flag.

On the other hand, if the display executed by the third symbol display device 281 is changing as a result of the processing of S2508 (S2508: Yes), the display pointer provided in the work RAM 433 is updated (S2513). The process proceeds to S2514. As a result, the display of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 can be advanced according to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

In the process of S2514, it is determined whether or not the stop flag for instructing the stop of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2514). Then, if the stop flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2514: No), the effect execution timetable (see FIG. 33) stored in the work RAM 433 is reset by the process of S2152 or updated by the process of S2513. The information described at the position of the display pointer is acquired (S2515). Then, from the acquired information, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified at the time specified by the display pointer, and the drawing of the image is set (S2516). As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image described at the display pointer position of the effect execution timetable by the process of S2527 described later, so that the display of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. , Proceed according to the production execution timetable.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an image transfer command in the information acquired by the process of S2515 (S2517). Then, if there is an image transfer command (S2517: Yes), the image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on, and the transfer target image type specified by the transfer command is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2518). ), The process proceeds to S2526. As a result, the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Here, as described above, in the effect execution timetable, a transfer command is described so that a necessary image is transferred in advance before being displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 434 and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Therefore, it is possible to execute each effect while smoothly shifting each image specified in the effect execution timetable.

On the other hand, if there is no image transfer command in the information acquired by the process of S2515 as a result of the process of S2517 (S2517: No), the process of S2518 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2526.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2514, if the stop flag for instructing the stop of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2514: Yes), first, the display stop. The drawing of the stop symbol set by the symbol command is set (S2519). As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command by the process of S2527 described later. Since the third symbol used in the stop symbol is resident in advance in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, the stop flag is set even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 434. After being turned on, the stop symbol can be drawn immediately, and the stop symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the pachinko machine 200, when the display stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol is added to the effect execution timetable stored in the work RAM 433 by the command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 51). If the image drawing process is performed according to the effect execution timetable, the added stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 after the fluctuation time elapses. However, if the MPU 431 malfunctions due to the influence of noise or the like, after the fluctuation time elapses. However, the stop symbol may not be displayed. Here, the pachinko machine 200 is set so that when the stop flag is turned on by the process of S2519, the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is drawn, so that the third symbol display The stop symbol can be always displayed on the device 281.

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2520). Then, if the continuous advance notice flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2520: No), the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the variation effect that starts the display based on the fact that the change start flag is turned on. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2526. On the other hand, if the continuous advance notice flag is on (S2520), it means that the continuous advance notice effect has been executed in the change effect that started the display based on the change start flag being turned on. After turning off the middle flag (S2521), the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 433b for counting the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2522).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 433b after the update is 0 (S2523). Here, the continuous advance notice number counter 433b is set in advance with the number of continuous advance notices included in the continuous advance notice setting command received from the voice lamp control device 313 (that is, the number of times the continuous advance notice effect is executed). Therefore, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 433b after the update becomes 0, it means that the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of continuous notices instructed by the continuous notice setting command. Therefore, as a result of the processing of S2523, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 433b after the update is 0 (S2523: Yes), the continuous notice holding flag 433c is set to off (S2524), and the process proceeds to S2526. As a result, the overwriting restriction of other image data provided for the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d of the normal video RAM 436 in which the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored is released. Will be done.

On the other hand, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 433b after the update is not 0 as a result of the processing of S2523 (S2523: No), the processing of S2524 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2526.

Further, as a result of the processing of S2509, if the fluctuation start flag for permitting the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is not on, that is, if it is off (S2509: No). A predetermined image according to the situation of the pachinko machine 200, for example, a drawing of a customer waiting effect to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player, and the process proceeds to S2526. Transition.

In the process of S2526, the drawing of the background image is set (S2526), and the process proceeds to the process of S2527. Here, the background images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are "city" (background A), "underwater" (background B), and "sky" (sky) according to the background image type stored in the work RAM 433. Select from background C). Then, a predetermined display area is determined from the scroll range prepared for the selected background image so that the background image is scrolled from right to left. Then, the setting is made so that the fixed display area is drawn with respect to the selected background image.

Further, the background image command received from the voice lamp control device 313 is determined by the processing of S2409 and S2410 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51), and the new background image type is stored in the work RAM 433 for the first time in this S2526. When the process of is executed, the initial position (position a to position a'in FIG. 31) of the newly set background image is fixed as the display area.

As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed by the process of S2527 described later so that the display area determined by the process of S2526 is drawn from the background image set by the background image change command. Here, when the background image type is "city" (background A), the image data corresponding to the background A is stored in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 over the entire scrolled range. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured with the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, when the background image type is changed to "city" (background A) by the background image change command, the background A is immediately changed to the third symbol. The display device 281 can be scrolled.

In addition, the image data of the background B and the background C corresponding to the background image types "underwater" and "sky" are also positioned from the initial positions (positions a in FIGS. 31B and 31C) displayed after the background image is changed. The image data in the predetermined range (positions a to b in FIGS. 31B and 31C) including a') is stored in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435.

Here, the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, so that even if the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing, In order to change the background image immediately, it is ideal that the image data of the entire scrolled range (the image corresponding to the position a to the position d) is resident in the resident video RAM 435 for all the background images. However, if this is done, a RAM having a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 435, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the background image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the background image change command is used. When the background image type is changed to "underwater" (background B) or "sky" (background C), at least the image in the range from position a to position b is resident in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. By using the image data, the initial positions of the background B and the background C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and can be scrolled. Further, with respect to the background B and the background C, since only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 and suppress an increase in cost. it can.

Further, while the range from the position a to the position b in FIGS. 31 (b) and 31 (c) is scrolled from left to right, the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d is displayed in the character ROM 434. Since the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer from the position a to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436 can be completed, the position from the position b'is displayed while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. The image data of d can be transferred to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 236. Therefore, after scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data stored in the background image area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, the background stored in the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the image, the range from the position b'to the position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the process of S2527, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw each image whose drawing is set by the processes of S2503 to S2526 (S2527), the image drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Specifically, the address of the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in which the image data corresponding to each image for which drawing is set is stored is specified, and the information of the storage destination video RAM (resident video RAM 435) is specified. Or the normal video RAM 436) and its storage destination address are instructed to the image controller 437. The image controller 437 reads image data from a predetermined address of each video RAM according to the drawing instruction, draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the image data, and draws the drawn image. Generate data. Then, by outputting the generated drawn image data to the third symbol display device 281, the image drawn on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed.

Next, the image transfer command process (S2309) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the image transfer command processing (S2309). This image transfer command processing (S2309) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is used as the resident video RAM 435 or the normal. Transfer to the video RAM 436 for use.

In this image transfer command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the image display flag 433a at power-on is on (S2601). If the image display flag 433a at power-on is on (S2601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, so that the resident image is not transferred. The transfer command process is executed (S2602), the image transfer command process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the transfer process of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed. The details of the resident image transfer command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2601, if the image display flag 433a at power-on is not on, that is, is off (S2601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is resident from the character ROM 434. It is transferred to the video RAM 435 for use. Therefore, in this case, the normal image transfer command process is executed (S2603), the image transfer command process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436. The details of the image transfer command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the resident image transfer command process (S2602) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer command processing (S2602). This resident image transfer command processing (S2602) is executed in the image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54 (a)) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435. Is a process for transferring the image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435.

In this resident image transfer command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer command for untransferred image data has been transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2701), and if the transfer command has been transmitted (S2701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer command (S2702). In the process of S2702, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437 after transmitting the image data transfer command to the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S2702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller, so that the resident image transfer command process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2702: Yes), the process proceeds to S2703. Further, as a result of the processing of S2701, even if the transfer command of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2703.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred (S2703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S2703: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2704) so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the resident image transfer command process is terminated. Here, the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the resident image data is stored, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 189), and the transfer destination (resident transferred here). A transfer command including the start address of the resident video RAM 189 (area provided in the resident video RAM 189) for storing the target image data is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437. The image controller 437 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer command, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 434, and transfers the image data to the specified address of the designated video RAM. The details of the image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S2703 (S2703: Yes), the image display flag 433a at power-on is set to off (S2705), and the resident image transfer command processing is completed. To do. As a result, in the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image in the normal state instead of the image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 is instructed to draw the image in the normal time. The image is displayed, and the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) (S2601: No. in FIG. 54 (a). And S2603).

By executing this resident image transfer command process, the MPU 431 is resident in all resident video RAM 435s except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Then, the MPU 431 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the 435 by the resident video RAM 435 will be resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display control device 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 while using the image controller. The image drawing process can be performed at 437. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

In particular, the resident video RAM 435 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a background image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 310, an audio lamp control device 313, and a display control device 314. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such means, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, the third symbol is derived from various operations performed by the player. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the display device 281 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer command processing (S2603) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer command processing (S2603). This normal image transfer command processing (S2603) is executed in the image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54 (a)) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image data to be stored in the normal video RAM 436. Is a process for transferring from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

In this normal image transfer command process, first, after the previous transfer process is completed, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer command has been transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2801), and the transfer command is transmitted. (S2801: Yes), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer command (S2802). In the process of S2802, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437 after transmitting the image data transfer command to the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S2802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2802: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller, so that the normal image transfer command process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2802: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2803. Further, as a result of the processing of S2801, even if the image data transfer command is not transmitted to the image controller 437 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S2801: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433, which indicates whether or not the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, is on. (S2803), if the continuous advance notice image transfer start flag is on (S2803: Yes), the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process is executed (S2804), and the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is set as the transfer target image. In addition, the area 1 provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. The details of the continuous preview image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2803, if the continuous advance notice image transfer start flag is not on, that is, is off (S2803: No), then the image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable (see FIG. 33). It is determined whether or not the image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433, which indicates whether or not the image data corresponding to the above should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, is on (S2805). Then, if the image transfer start flag is on (S2805: Yes), the image transfer setting process is executed (S2806), and the image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is set as the transfer target image. Further, the area 1 provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. The details of the image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

On the other hand, if the image transfer start flag is not on, that is, is off (S2805: No) as a result of the processing of S2805, then the image data corresponding to the background image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the background image E of the normal video RAM 436. It is determined whether or not the background image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the data should be transferred to the area 436e is on (S2807). If the background image transfer start flag is on (S2807: Yes), the background image transfer setting process is executed (S2808), and the background image corresponding to the background image type stored in the work RAM 433 is used as the transfer target image. The background image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. The details of the background image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

As a result of the processing of S2807, if the background image transfer start flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2807: No), there is no image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436, so the normal image transfer command processing is terminated. To do.

In the process of S2809, the transfer target image data is transferred to the designated storage area of the normal video RAM 436 based on the transfer target image set by each process of S2804, S2806, and S2808 and the designated storage area. A transfer command is transmitted to the controller 437 (S2809). Specifically, the start address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the transfer target image set in each process is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the normal video RAM 436). ) And the address of the designated storage area as the transfer destination address are generated and transferred to the image controller 437. Then, after transferring the transfer command, the normal image transfer command process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process (S2804) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this continuous advance notice image transfer setting process (S2804). In the continuous preview image transfer setting process (S2804), it is determined that the continuous preview image transfer start flag is on in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. In this case, the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is set as the transfer target image, and the area 1 provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area.

In this continuous advance notice image transfer setting process, first, the continuous advance notice image transfer start flag is turned off (S2901), and then the area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is designated and stored. It is set as an area (S2902). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, the second priority image C area 436c is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the second priority image D area 436d is set as the designated storage area. Set. As a result, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is transferred to either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d specified here.

Next, the second priority image storage flag 433e is updated (S2903). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, if the designated storage area of the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is set in the second priority image C area 436c by the processing of S2902, then the second priority image data (second priority image C area 436c or When transferring (data stored in the second priority image D area 436d), the designated storage area is set in the second priority image D area 436d. Further, if the designated storage area of the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is set to the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S2902, when the second priority image data is transferred next, the designated storage area is set. The second priority image C area 436c is set.

Further, the continuous notice holding flag 433c is set to ON (S2904). The continuous advance notice holding flag 433c is kept on until the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the number of continuous advance notice effects instructed by the continuous advance notice setting command (see FIG. 46), and the continuous advance notice effect for the number of continuous advance notice effects is executed. If so, it is set to off (see S2523 and S2524 in FIG. 52).

While the continuous advance notice holding flag 433c is set to ON, the second priority image data other than the image used in the continuous advance notice effect is transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. In this case, the update of the second priority image storage flag 433e is not executed. As a result, when the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the continuous advance notice is performed while the continuous advance notice effect is continuously executed. Overwriting of the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in which the image data used in the effect is held is restricted.

Here, by this continuous advance notice image transfer setting process, all the images used in the continuous advance notice effect displayed over the plurality of variable effects are preliminarily displayed in the second priority image C area 436c or before the start of the actual continuous advance notice effect. It is transferred to the second priority image D area 436d. Then, while the continuous advance notice effect is continuously executed, the image data for the continuous advance notice effect transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is retained without being overwritten. , The display control device 314 immediately uses the image data for the continuous advance notice effect transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in advance before the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Can draw an image for. Further, since it is not necessary to transfer the image data for the continuous advance notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d for each variation display, the character ROM 434 and the bus line 440 do not need to be transferred. It is possible to prevent such things from becoming busy.

After the processing of S2904, the continuous advance notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is confirmed by the processing of S2415 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 51), and it is determined whether or not it is a step-up type (S2905). If it is not a step-up type (S2905: No), since the continuous advance notice type is the same effect type, "bubble" is set as the transfer target image (S2906), and the continuous notice image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, the image data corresponding to the "bubble" image is transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the image data corresponding to the "bubble" image is continuously held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, which is the storage destination, until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of consecutive notices. .. Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw the "bubble" image when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, and at the same time, the "bubble" image is drawn from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area for each variation display. It is not necessary to transfer to the 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and it is possible to prevent the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like from becoming busy.

On the other hand, if the continuous notice type is a step-up type as a result of the processing of S2905 (S2905), then it is determined whether or not the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice number counter 433b is 4 (S2907). Then, if the number of continuous notices is 4 (S2907: Yes), "eggs", "chicks", "chickens", and "chicken groups" are set as transfer target images (S2908), and the continuous notice image transfer setting process is performed. finish. As a result, by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55), the image data corresponding to each image of the "tamago", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" is the second priority image C area. It is transferred to the 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. Then, the image data corresponding to these images is continuously held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, which is the storage destination, until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of consecutive notices. Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw an image of the continuous advance notice effect mode indicated by the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, and for each variation display It is not necessary to transfer each image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and it is possible to prevent the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like from becoming busy.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2907, if the number of continuous notices is not 4 (S2907: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice number counter 433b is 3 (S2909). If the number of continuous advance notices is 3 (S2909: Yes), "eggs", "chicks", and "chicken groups" are set as transfer target images (S2910), and the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process is completed.

Further, as a result of the processing of S2909, if the number of continuous notices is not 3 (S2909: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice number counter 433b is 2 (S2911). If the number of continuous advance notices is 2 (S2911: Yes), "eggs" and "chicken groups" are set as transfer target images (S2912), and the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process is completed. On the other hand, if the number of continuous notices is not 2 (S2911: No), it can be determined that the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice number counter 433b is 1, so a "chicken group" is set as the transfer target image (S2913). , Ends the continuous preview image transfer setting process.

As a result, by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55), the image data corresponding to each image used in the step-up type continuous advance notice effect is the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D. Transferred to area 436d. Then, the image data corresponding to these images is continuously held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, which is the storage destination, until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of consecutive notices.

Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw an image of the continuous advance notice effect mode indicated by the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, and for each variation display It is not necessary to transfer each image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and it is possible to prevent the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like from becoming busy. Further, when the continuous advance notice type is a step-up type, the images used for the continuous advance notice effect are limited by the number of continuous advance notices. However, in this continuous advance notice image transfer setting process, the images required according to the number of continuous advance notices. Since only the image to be transferred is set, the access time of the character ROM 434 and the time when the bus line 440 is used can be shortened, and the processing load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

Next, the image transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this image transfer setting process (S2806). This image transfer setting process (S2806) is executed when it is determined that the image transfer start flag is on in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. The image specified by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable (see FIG. 33) is set as the transfer target image, and the area 1 provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area.

In this image transfer setting process, first, the image transfer start flag is turned off (S3001), and then by the process of S2517 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the effect The transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the execution timetable is read from the work RAM 433, and the target image is stored in the first priority image, that is, the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. It is determined whether or not the image should be (S3002). Here, when the transfer target image type is any one of "super reach A", "super reach B", "notice effect A", and "notice effect B", the target image is the first priority image. to decide.

Then, if the target image is the first priority image (S3002: Yes), then whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. Is determined (S3003). In the present embodiment, when the designated storage area, which is the storage destination of the transfer target image, is set to either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b by the process of S3004 described later, the setting is made. At the same time, the transfer target image type stored in the designated storage area is stored in the work RAM 433 in association with the set designated storage area. Therefore, in the processing of S3003, the image types stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are read from the work RAM 433 and compared with the transfer target image types read by the processing of S3002. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3003, if the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b (S3003: Yes), the process returns to the normal image transfer command processing and remains as it is. The normal image transfer command is terminated (see FIG. 55). As a result, the transfer processing of the image data of the target image from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b is not performed. That is, when the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the image data of the target image is duplicated from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area. Since it is possible to prevent the transfer to the 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, it is possible to suppress the repetitive transfer of the relatively used first priority image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. ..

In particular, the first priority image data stored in the two storage areas of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b includes "super reach A", "super reach B", and "notice effect". Since there are only four types, "A" and "notice effect B", rewriting of each area does not occur much. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

Further, in this case, even if the image data of the target image is not transferred from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the image data of the target image is already in the first priority image A area. Since it is stored in the 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, when the drawing of the target image is set by the effect execution timetable, the display control device 314 has the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority. An image can be immediately drawn using the image data of the target image stored in the image B area 436b, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3003, if the image data of the target image is not stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b (S3003: No), then the first priority image storage flag 433d The area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of is set as the designated storage area (S3004). That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d is 0, the first priority image A area 436a is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the first priority image B area 436b is set as the designated storage area. Set. As a result, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b specified here.

Then, the first priority image storage flag 433d is updated (S3005). That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the first priority image A area 436a by the processing of S3004, the designated storage area is transferred when the first priority image data (image data of the first priority image) is transferred next. Is set in the first priority image B area 436b. Further, if the designated storage area is set to the first priority image B area 436b by the processing of S3004, the designated storage area is set to the first priority image A area 436a when the first priority image data is transferred next. Will be done. Therefore, the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b can be alternately selected as the storage destination of the first priority image data.

After the processing of S3005, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2517 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is determined. It is set as the image to be transferred (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is completed. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). Transferred to 436b. Then, once stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b, the stored first priority image data is retained until the next first priority image data to be stored appears. To. Therefore, when the drawing of the target image is set by the effect execution timetable, the display control device 314 is the image of the target image stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. An image can be drawn immediately using the data, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3002, the target image is the first priority image, that is, from the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable. If the image should not be stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b (S3002: No), then the target image is the second priority image, that is, the second priority image C area 436c. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the image should be stored in the second priority image D area 436d (S3007). Here, when the transfer target image type is any one of "super reach C" to "super reach E" and "notice effect C" to "notice effect E", the target image is the second priority image. to decide.

Then, if the target image is the second priority image (S3007: Yes), then whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436c. Is determined (S3008). In the present embodiment, similarly to the processing of S3004, the designated storage area as the storage destination of the transfer target image is set to either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S3009 described later. When setting, the transfer target image type stored in the designated storage area is stored in the work RAM 433 in association with the set designated storage area together with the setting. Therefore, in the processing of S3008, the image types stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are read from the work RAM 433 and compared with the transfer target image types read by the processing of S3002. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d.

If, as a result of the processing of S3008, the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d (S3008: Yes), the process returns to the normal image transfer command processing and remains as it is. The normal image transfer command is terminated (see FIG. 55). As a result, the transfer processing of the image data of the target image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is not performed as in the case where the target image is the first priority image. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second priority image data, which is relatively used in accordance with the first priority image data, from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

Further, even if the image data of the target image is not transferred from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the image data of the target image is already in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image C area 436c. Since it is stored in the 2 priority image D area 436d, when the drawing of the target image is set by the effect execution timetable, the display control device 314 uses the 2nd priority image C area 436c or the 2nd priority image D area. An image can be immediately drawn using the image data of the target image stored in the 436d, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3008, if the image data of the target image is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d (S3008: No), then the second priority image storage flag 433e The area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of is set as the designated storage area (S3009). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, the second priority image C area 436c is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the second priority image D area 436d is set as the designated storage area. Set. As a result, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d specified here.

Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice holding flag 433c is on (S3010), and if it is not on but off (S3010: Yes), the second priority image storage flag 433e is updated (S3011). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the second priority image C area 436c by the processing of S3009, the designated storage area is transferred when the second priority image data (image data of the second priority image) is transferred next. Is set in the second priority image D area 436d. Further, if the designated storage area is set to the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S3009, the designated storage area is set to the second priority image C area 436c when the second priority image data is transferred next. Will be done. Therefore, when the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect being executed is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the second priority image data is stored as the second priority image. The A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b can be alternately selected.

On the other hand, if the continuous advance notice holding flag 433c is turned on as a result of the processing of S3010 (S3010: Yes), the processing of S3011 is skipped. As a result, the second priority image storage flag 433e is not updated. Therefore, when the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect being executed is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, it is continuous. The image data corresponding to the advance notice effect is the second priority on the side where the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is not stored until it is displayed for the number of continuous advance notices set by the voice lamp control device 313. The image data to be stored next will continue to be overwritten on the image area. Therefore, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is always held in the second priority image area while the continuous advance notice effect is being executed.

Here, as described above, all the images used in the continuous advance notice effect displayed over the plurality of variable effects by the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process are the second priority images in advance before the start of the actual continuous advance notice effect. Since the data is transferred to the C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is continuously held in the second priority image area while the continuous advance notice effect is being executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to transfer the image data for the continuous advance notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d for each variation display. Therefore, since the number of times of transferring the image data for the continuous advance notice effect can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like from being in a busy state.

When it is determined by the processing of S3010 that the continuous advance notice holding flag 432c is on (S3010: Yes), or after the processing of S3011, the process proceeds to the processing of S3006 and is stored in the work RAM 433 as described above. The transfer target image type, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command in the effect execution timetable is set as the transfer target image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is completed. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). Transferred to 436d. Then, once stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the stored second priority image data is retained until the next second priority image data to be stored appears. To. Therefore, when the drawing of the target image is set by the effect execution timetable, the display control device 314 is the image of the target image stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. An image can be drawn immediately using the data, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

Further, when the target image is not the second priority image as a result of the processing of S3007 (S3007: No), then the area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of the normal image storage flag 433f is set as the designated storage area. Set (S3012). That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f is 0, the normal image F area 436f is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the normal image G area 436g is set as the designated storage area. As a result, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g specified here.

Then, the normal image storage flag 433f is updated (S3013). That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 1, the value is reset to 0. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the normal image F area 436f by the processing of S3012, the next time the normal image data (image data of the normal image) is transferred, the designated storage area is the normal image G area 436 g. Is set to. Further, if the designated storage area is set to the normal image G area 436g by the process of S3012, the designated storage area is set to the normal image F area 436f when the normal image data is transferred next time.

Therefore, the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g can be alternately selected as the storage destination of the normal image data. As a result, while the image data is being read from one normal image area where the writing of the image data is completed for image drawing, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is written to the other normal image area. Therefore, it is possible to reliably transfer the next image data to the normal image area by the time the next image data is required in the drawing process.

After the processing of S3013, the process proceeds to S3006, and as described above, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is transferred. It is set as an image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is completed. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution timetable is transferred to the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). To. Therefore, when the drawing of the target image is set by the effect execution timetable, the display control device 314 immediately uses the image data of the target image stored in the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g. An image can be drawn on the screen, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

Next, the background image transfer setting process (S2808) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this background image transfer setting process (S2808). This background image transfer setting process (S2808) is performed when it is determined that the background image transfer start flag is on in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. The background image corresponding to the background image type to be transferred is set as the transfer target image, and the background image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area.

When the background image type instructed by the background image change command received from the voice lamp control device 313 is "underwater" (background B) or "sky" (background C), this background image transfer setting process is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the background image type specified by the background image change command is "city" (background A), the image data corresponding to the entire scroll range of the background image is resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the background image transfer start flag is not turned on (see S2411 in FIG. 51), and therefore this background image transfer setting process is not executed.

In this background image transfer setting process, first, the background image transfer start flag is turned off (S3101), and then the background image E area 436e provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area (S3102). Then, the background image type included in the background image change command stored in the work RAM is read out by the process of S2410 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51), and whether or not the background image indicated by the background image type is "underwater". (S3103). As a result, if the background image is "underwater" (S3103: Yes), "underwater" is set as the transfer target image (S3104), the background image transfer setting process is completed, and the background image indicated by the background image type is completed. If is not "underwater" (S3103: No), the background image is "sky". Therefore, "sky" is set as the transfer target image (S3105), and the background image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the background image "underwater" (background B) or the background image "sky" (background C) set as the transfer target image by the processing of S3104 or S3105 by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). ), The image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d shown in FIG. 31B or (c) is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436. Then, by receiving the background image transfer command and using the image data resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the range from the position a to the position b shown in FIG. 31 (b) or (c). Since the range from position a to position c is set so that the image data from position b'to position d is transferred to the background image E area 436e of the normal RAM 236 while scrolling, the resident video RAM 435 After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the background image area 435d of the above, it corresponds to the background image transferred to the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 during the scrolling. The range from the position b'to the position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data to be generated.

Next, the image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this image transfer process. This image transfer process is repeatedly executed in the main process executed by the image controller 437, and when the image data transfer command is received by the MPU 431, the resident video RAM 435 or the resident video RAM 435 or the character ROM 434 is executed according to the received transfer command. This is a process of transferring image data to a normal video RAM 436.

In this image transfer process, first, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a provided in the image controller 437, which is started by the process of S3206 described later, is being executed (S3201). If the transfer process is not being executed (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the image data transfer command has been received from the MPU 431 (S3202).

Then, if the image data transfer command has not been received (S3202: No), this image transfer process ends. On the other hand, if the image data transfer command is received (S3202: Yes), then the start address of the transfer source character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is extracted from the received transfer command, and the image controller It is stored in the transfer source pointer provided in the RAM in 437 (S3203). Further, the transfer destination information (whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436) is extracted from the received transfer command, and the extracted information is transferred to the RAM provided in the image controller 437. Store in the destination flag (S3204). Further, the address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) is extracted from the received transfer instruction and stored in the transfer destination pointer provided in the RAM in the image controller 437 (S3205).

Then, the data for one block of the NAND flash memory 434a is read from the character ROM 434 from the address indicated by the transfer source pointer, and the transfer start is set in the image controller 437 so that the data is transferred to the buffer RAM 437a. (Direct Memory Access) Instructs the circuit (S3206) to end the image transfer process. As a result, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a is performed by the DMA circuit, so that the image controller 437 executes another process such as an image drawing process while the transfer process is being executed. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the image data transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a is being executed as a result of the process of S3201 (S3201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a is completed. (S3207). If the transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a is not completed (S3207: No), another process is executed until the image transfer process is completed and the transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a is completed. On the other hand, if the transfer process is completed (S3207: Yes), then the video RAM (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) indicated by the transfer destination flag stored by the process of S3204 is in the image controller 437. It is determined whether or not it is in use by an image drawing process, a transfer process of drawing image data to the third symbol display device 281, or the like (S3208).

Then, if the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag is in use (S3208: Yes), the image transfer process is terminated, and another process is executed until the video RAM is in an unused state. If the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag is not in use (S3208: No), the image data transferred to the buffer RAM 437a is the image data of the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag stored by the processing of S3204, of S3205. The data is stored in order from the address indicated by the transfer destination pointer stored by the process (S3209).

Then, when the processing of S3209 is completed, the data amount of the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 via the buffer RAM 437a and the transfer instruction are subsequently included in the transfer instruction. By comparing with the data size of the image data to be transferred, it is determined whether or not all the data to be transferred has been transferred (S3210).

Then, when all the image data to be transferred is not transferred, that is, when there is untransferred image data (S3210: No), an update process for advancing the transfer source pointer by one block is performed (S3211), and further. The update process of advancing the transfer destination pointer by one block is performed (S3212), and the process proceeds to the process of S3206. Then, in the process of S3206, as described above, the data for one block of the NAND flash memory 434a is read from the character ROM 434 from the address indicated by the updated transfer source pointer and transferred to the buffer RAM 437a. , Instructs the DMA circuit provided in the image controller 437 to start the transfer, and ends the image transfer process.

After that, in the image transfer process executed in the main process again, when the completion of the image data transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a started in the process of S3206 is detected (S3207: Yes), the transfer destination flag indicates. When the video RAM is unused, the process of sequentially storing the image data transferred to the buffer RAM 437a from the address indicated by the transfer destination pointer after the update of the video RAM is executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3210, when all the data to be transferred is transferred (S3210: Yes), the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431 (S3213), and the image transfer process is terminated. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer command has been completed in the image controller 437. Therefore, the MPU 431 can notify the image controller 437 of another image data transfer command.

As described above, in the transfer of the image data in the image controller 437, the process of reading the image data to be transferred one block at a time from the character ROM 434 and sequentially writing the image data to the transfer destination video RAM is performed, and the transfer of all the image data to be transferred is performed. It is done by repeatedly executing until it is completed.

Here, since the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, the image data is then transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is performed by the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 281 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the second embodiment, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on, so that the initialization is performed. After the processing is completed, the image controller 437 can perform the image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device. In particular, the image data of an image that is frequently displayed, or the image data of an image that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, or the like is a resident video. Since it is resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player to displaying some image on the third symbol display device 281.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, since the character ROM 434 uses the NAND type flash memory 434a, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 due to the slow read speed is transmitted from the character ROM 434. It takes a lot of time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 435, but after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at power-on is transferred. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and the person concerned with the hall turn on the power displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. You can check the main image.

Therefore, the display control device 310 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third display device 218, so that the pachinko machine 200 has started the operation without any problem by turning on the power. You can check it immediately. Therefore, by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187, reads the image data from the character ROM 187, and transfers the image data to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and transfers the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. You may go. In this case, the image data is stored in the address of the character ROM 187 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, the video RAM of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190), and the video RAM of the transfer destination. The power address is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 reads out the image data stored at the address position of the character ROM 187 specified by this transfer command, and the designated transfer destination. The read image data may be stored in the designated address area of the video RAM. Further, in this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 187 in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the image controller 188 does not use the transfer destination video RAM, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a. May be stored in the video RAM of the transfer destination.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 431 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 437, and the image controller 431 receives the transfer command from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. The case of transferring image data has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROM 434, read the image data from the character ROM 434, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 434 by the MPU 431 is temporarily stored in the buffer ROM 437a, and then the MPU 431 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer ROM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 437 is accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing (that is, in use) the normal video RAM 434 (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 437 so that the MPU 431 confirms the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436 is monitored by the MPU 431 and used resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts access to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 or ends the access, the image controller 437 notifies the MPU 431 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 431 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third symbol display device 281, the MPU 431 confirms the driving state of the image controller 437 to check whether or not the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11) or an image. If it is grasped by the notification from the controller 437 and the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 435 and 436 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 281 of the image controller 437 is confirmed to determine whether or not the image controller 437 is in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not manage the respective video RAMs by using the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the conventional video RAMs 190 and 436, but instead manage the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. In the address system commonly used with the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU181,431 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 189,435 or normal video RAM 190,436) to be accessed from the image controllers 188,437, but simply assigns an address. Just by specifying, the image controllers 188,437 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAMs 189,435 or for the normal video RAMs 190,436. That is, when the MPU181,431 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controllers 188,437, simply specify the address set in the common address system. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that specifies the specification. For example, in the second embodiment, in the image data transfer command transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, the transfer destination information (whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 435 or to the normal video RAM 436) is transferred. Since it is only necessary to specify the forwarding destination address using the address set in the common address system without including it, the configuration of the forwarding instruction can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the MPU181, 431 and the image controller are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character The ROMs 187 and 434 may be provided by directly connecting to the image controllers 188 and 437. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROMs 187 and 434 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit. It may be provided by connecting to. By providing this bridge circuit, a NAND flash memory can be used as it is by using the existing image controllers 188, 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. Character ROMs 187 and 434 composed of 187a and 434a can be connected. Even when the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected via the image controllers 188 and 437 and the bridge circuit, the character ROMs 187 and 434 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPUs 181 and 431.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are composed of the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as , Hard disk, etc. may be used. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control devices 81 and 314 having the configurations described in the above embodiments, the image can be displayed at the desired time. Can be displayed without.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the MPU 181 and 431, the character ROMs 187 and 434 and the image controller 188 are not necessarily limited to this. , 437 may be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the 437 is connected. When the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controller 188, 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) is not configured so that the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be directly connected. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display control devices 81 and 314.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 189, 435 and one normal video RAM 190, 436 are provided in the display control devices 81, 314 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is limited to this. More video RAM may be provided instead of the one. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by a 1-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a multi-port type RAM may be used.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is used as a resident area. And the normal area may be divided into, and the same contents as those of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type is appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. It may be what is done. In this case, an image corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 in response to a reception command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 313 or other external input. It is preferable to make the data resident at least in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROMs 187 and 434 is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROMs 187 and 434 have been described. May be transferred to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the character ROMs 187 and 434 that are not resident in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controllers 188 and 437. It may be used as a dedicated memory for storing.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not overwritten and the contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control means 101 or the voice lamp is used. Image data to be resident in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is significantly different based on the command received from the control device 313. May be overwritten and updated. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 when the power is turned on, and is retained in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You may try to continue. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read the image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is read through the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. , The resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be transferred while they are unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 181 and 431 transmit a new resident image data transfer command to the image controllers 188 and 437, and the image controllers 188 and 437 follow the transfer command. Image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187 and 434, and the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) via the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. You may want to transfer to.

When updating the resident video RAMs 189 and 435, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 to the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 in advance, and the images stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are stored. The transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 using the data. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434, read out the newly resident image data, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 188a. You may try to do it. Alternatively, the image controllers 188,437 that have received the transfer command of the image data to be resident from MPU181,431 access the character ROMs 187,434, read out the newly resident image data, and buffer the read image data. It may be transferred via the RAM 188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided inside the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be provided outside the image controllers 188 and 437. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440). Further, when the character ROMs 187 and 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (which exchanges many data signals) Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by the bus line 440).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437 is one block of the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is appropriately set. You may. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281, the period of scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed (blank period). ), The storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a may be such that the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436 utilizes the unused period of each video RAM 189, 190, 435, 436 that occurs during this blank period. By doing so, it can be done reliably.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a and 437a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one buffer RAM, the images stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 from another buffer RAM. It may be configured to transfer data. Further, the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from another area to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the conventional video RAMs 190, 436. In any case, the image data read from the character ROMs 187,434 is written to the buffer RAM, and the image data written to the buffer RAM is written to the resident video RAMs 189,435 or the normal video RAMs 190,436. Since the transfer can be processed in parallel, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on has been described. The image data corresponding to the image may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 190, the character ROM 187 resides in the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the power-on main image on the auxiliary display unit 65. Image data to be transferred can be transferred. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 189. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is input from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 at power-on main image area 435a and power-on fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 435b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 434 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 436. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 435. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 435. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image is resident from the character ROM 187 without going through the buffer RAM 188a when the power is turned on. When the power of the video RAM 189 is turned on, the video RAM 189 may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used for auxiliary display. By displaying the main image when the power is turned on in the unit 65, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. If so, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without going through the buffer RAM 188a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 188a.

Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 via the buffer RAM 437a in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on. The case of transferring to the time-varying image area 435b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred. , The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the main image area 435a at power-on and the variable image area 435b at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 without going through the buffer RAM 437a. You may. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 436 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 435 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 437a.

In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 has described the case where the background image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101. In addition to this, the display control device 81 has been described. Alternatively, separately from this, an operation button capable of changing the background image of the auxiliary display unit 65 by the player is provided in the slot machine 10, and the background image is changed when the operation button is operated by the player. You may. Specifically, the output signal output from the operation button when the operation button is operated by the player is input to the input / output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 is input from the operation button. After confirming that the operation button has been operated by the player, it is determined to change the background image, and the image data corresponding to the background image to be displayed after the change stored in the background image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is displayed. The image controller 188 may be instructed to use the image to draw an image. As a result, after the operation buttons are operated by the player, the changed background image is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data stored in the background image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189. be able to. Therefore, even when the character ROM 187 is configured by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a read speed, the auxiliary display unit 65 immediately responds to the operation of the player and displays the changed background image. be able to.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 313 generates a background image change command, and the display control device 314 is based on the background image change command. 3. The case of changing the background image displayed on the symbol display device 281 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 313 grasps the game state of the game machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. You may generate a background image change command. As a result, the display control device 314 can change the background image according to the game state based on the background image change command. Then, if the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the background image indicated by the background image type of the background image change command is resident in the background image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the resident range is used. The background image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the background image area 435c.

Further, the display control device 314 may not only change the background image based on the background image change command, but also change the background image according to the effect execution timetable. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed background image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 according to the transfer command described in the effect execution timetable. In this case, when the image data of the background image is transferred by the transfer command described in the effect execution timetable, the background image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 may be set as the designated storage area, or other areas may be set. It may be set as a designated storage area. Further, the background image H area may be provided in the normal video RAM 436 and set as the designated storage area. When the image data of the background image is transferred by the transfer command described in the effect execution timetable, if the image data other than the background image E area 436e is set, the image data stored in the background image E area 436e is retained. Therefore, for example, even if the background image is temporarily changed to a special image by the effect execution timetable, when the background image is returned to the normal background image (background B or C in FIG. 31), it is renewed. It is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the normal background image to the background image E area 436e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the display control device 314.

In the first embodiment, when the output signals of the first insertion medal detection sensor 45a and the second insertion medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main control device 101 and a sensor error is detected by the main control device 101, an error command is issued. Is transmitted to the display control device 81 so that the display control device 81 immediately displays an error message on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 causes a sensor error. When the presence / absence is detected and a sensor error is detected in the display control device 81, an error message is immediately sent to the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. May be displayed. As a result, it is not necessary to send and receive error commands from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, so that the error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 faster.

Further, in the second embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the voice lamp control device 313, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 313, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 314. As a result, the case where the display control device 314 immediately displays the error message on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited to this, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the main control device 310, the main control device 310 detects a vibration error, and the main control device 310 issues an error command for notifying the error by voice. It may be transmitted to either the lamp control device 313 or the display control device 314. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 314 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the display control device 314, the display control device 314 is configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error, and when the display control device 314 detects a vibration error, it is used resident. Error message of video RAM 435 An error message may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the image area 435f. As a result, it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, so that the error message can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 earlier.

Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game plate 213 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 428 or together with the vibration sensor 428, the magnet sensor is attached to the game plate 213. It may be attached to the back surface. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313, and the display control device 314. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 310, if it is determined that the main control device 310 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314 via the voice lamp control device 313 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 313, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 313 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314. Then, in the error message image image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313, the display control device 313 displays an error message image for notifying the magnetic field error resident in the error message image area 435f. The error message image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by using the corresponding image data. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined by the display control device 314 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 May display the error message image on the third symbol display device 218 by using the image data corresponding to the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error resident in the error message image area 435f. As a result, when the display control device 314 receives an error command from the main control device 310 or the voice lamp control device 313, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 434 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 434a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 281. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 281, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

In the first embodiment, the case where the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 are driven by the display control device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 use the auxiliary display unit 65. It may be configured to be driven by a voice lamp control device provided separately from the display control device 81 to be driven. In this case, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received by the voice lamp control device, and the display control device 81 is based on the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device based on the command from the main control device 101. The auxiliary display unit 64 may be controlled. Further, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the voice lamp control device in response to the received command. By separately providing the display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 and the audio lamp control device for driving the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on the drive control of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the auxiliary display unit 65, more diverse and complicated image display can be executed, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration in which only one type of BB winning is provided as a winning mode in which a privilege to shift to a bonus state is given when a winning is established has been described, but a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations are provided. It may be configured. Further, the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state may be set to different values depending on the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established. That is, in the processing of S604 of the bonus state processing (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout number counter may be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established. Further, in the processing of S606 of the bonus state processing (see FIG. 17), when the state command meaning that the game is a BB game is set, the type of the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established is also set. You may. As a result, in the display control device 81, the effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established.

In the first embodiment, the case where the total number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state that shifts when the BB prize is established is set to 250 (setting of the remaining payout number counter in S604 of FIG. 17). (See), and the value set as the total number of medals paid out (remaining number of medals paid out) is not necessarily limited to this, and may be any number within the range stipulated by law or the like.

In the first embodiment described above, in the JAC game performed when the gaming state is in the bonus state, the case where the winning probability of the watermelon winning and the bell winning, which are small winning combinations, is set higher than that in the general gaming state will be described. However, the winning probability of either the watermelon winning or the bell winning may be set higher than that in the general game state. In addition, each winning probability in the bonus state may be determined so that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning with a large number of medals paid out is larger than that of the bell winning. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game can be raised, so that the player can receive a large number of medals to be paid out with a small number of medals. Further, since the total number of medals to be paid out can be paid out in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased for the hall side as well. In addition, a bonus-only winning mode that is established only when the game state is in the bonus state is provided, a large number of medals are paid out, and the winning probability of the bonus-only winning mode is set higher than in other winning modes in the bonus state. It may be configured to be. Further, the winning of the bonus exclusive winning mode may be established only in the case of three cards. As a result, even if the bonus game can be played with one or two cards, the player can be made to play the bonus game with three cards.

In the first embodiment, the cherry bell prize, which is a special small role prize, is won only when the game is played with one or two medals inserted, that is, when the game is played with one or two medals. Although the case where the lottery table is set so that the above is established, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the game is played with three medals inserted, that is, the game is played with three medals. In this case, the lottery table may be set so that the cherry bell prize is established. If the game is played with three medals and the cherry bell prize is established, the number of medals to be paid out may be three or other medals. In addition, the winning probability of the cherry bell winning when the game is played with three cards may be set by the lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB winnings, watermelon winnings, bell winnings, and replay winnings. As a result, it becomes difficult for the cherry bell prize to be established when three pieces are hung, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it is a special small role prize.

Similarly, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell prize, which is a special small winning combination prize, is established only when the game is played with one card, has been described. The lottery table is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the 7-bell prize is established even when the game is played with two or three cards. If the game is played with two or three medals and a 7-bell prize is established, the number of medals to be paid out may be two or other medals. If a 7-bell prize is established in the case of hanging two medals, it is more preferable to set the number of medals to be paid out to three. This is because the player can play another game using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. .. In addition, the winning probability of the 7-bell prize when the game is played with 3 cards may be set by the lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. As a result, it becomes difficult for the 7-bell prize to be established when three cards are hung, so that it is easy for the player to recognize that it is a special small role prize. On the other hand, the probability of winning a 7-bell prize when playing a game with 2 cards is such that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game is less than 2 in combination with other prizes including the cherry bell prize. It is preferable that it is set by the lottery table.

In the first embodiment described above, when a game is played with one or two medals, and if a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which are normal small role prizes, are established, three medals are paid out as the number of medals to be paid out. Although the case where is configured to be performed is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other medals may be configured to be paid out. In this case, different medals may be paid out depending on the number of watermelon winning medals paid out and the number of bell winning medals paid out. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for watermelon winning or bell winning when one or two medals are hung may be set to be larger than the maximum number of bets (3 in the above first embodiment). As a result, when the game is played with one or two medals, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the establishment of a watermelon prize or a bell prize in which many medals are paid out. Further, a multiple of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment) may be set as the number of medals to be paid out for watermelon winning or bell winning when one or two medals are hung. As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, then a game with the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out by the establishment of the BB prize (a game with three medals) is simply played. Can be consumed, so the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for watermelon winning or bell winning when one or two medals are hung may be set to 12 or 6 as in the case of three medals. As a result, it is not necessary to change the number of medals to be paid out according to the number of bets, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Further, the number of watermelon winning medals to be paid out may be set to a different number depending on whether the medals are hung on one or two medals. Depending on the case, the number of bell-winning medals paid out may be set to a different number. Further, the number of medals to be paid out at least one of the watermelon winning and the bell winning when one is hung may be set to two. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while expecting that the two medals will be inserted and the Cherry Bell prize will be paid out for three more medals. In addition, the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted in one or two medals is less than 100%. desirable. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the game is played with one or two medals and three medals are paid out when the cherry bell prize is established has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to a multiple (for example, 6 or 9) of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). .. Even with this, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the medals can be consumed simply by playing a game (a game with 3 cards) with the maximum number of bets that can be expected with a high probability that the BB prize will be established. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. On the other hand, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to 2 when the cherry bell prize is established when one is hung. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while expecting to win the Cherry Bell prize by inserting the two medals and paying out three more medals, without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game until the end. In these cases as well, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each winning mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a game is played with one medal and two medals are paid out when a 7-bell prize is established, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the number of medals to be paid out in this case may be set to a multiple (for example, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). As a result, if a 7-bell prize is established, the medals will be consumed simply by playing a game (a game with 3 medals) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out by the BB prize is established. Since it can be done, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also in this case, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the first embodiment described above, when the game is played with one medal, the winners of the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize are drawn by lottery, and if the cherry bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. We have explained the case where two medals are paid out when the 7-bell prize is established, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the cherry-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out. If the medals are paid out and a 7-bell prize is established, 3 medals may be paid out. As a result, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, two medals will be paid out, so the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be established in which three more medals are paid out. However, you can enjoy another game, and you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. In addition, if the 7-bell prize is established, three medals will be paid out, so the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. On the other hand, when the game is played with one card, only the cherry bell winning may be determined. As a result, regardless of whether the number of bets is 1 to 3, the winning combination of 7 bells is not included, so that the index value IV = 5 can be omitted from the lottery table, and the lottery for storing the lottery table can be omitted. The storage capacity of the table storage area 105a can be reduced, and the processing load of the lottery process can be reduced. Further, in this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established is set to 3, the player inserts the three medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established, and the player Furthermore, while expecting the establishment of the BB prize, another game can be played, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving any extra medals. In addition, if the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established is set to 2, the player inserts two medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize is established, and the player has three more medals. You can enjoy another game while expecting the Cherry Bell prize to be paid out, and you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. In these cases as well, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each winning mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, if 7 bells are not included as a special child actor winning in one piece and only cherry bells are supported, and the number of medals to be paid out in the cherry bells is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3. It may be set to 1/6, or when the number of medals paid out in the cherry bell winning is set to 2, the winning probability may be set to about 1 / 2.4.

In the first embodiment, in the lottery table, any one of BB prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, cherry bell prize, 7 bell prize and replay prize is assigned as the prize mode corresponding to the index value IV, and the prize mode is In the lottery, the case where any one of these winning modes is set as a winning combination has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a plurality of these winning modes are used for one index value IV. When the winning mode is assigned and the winning is confirmed at the one index value IV, a plurality of winning modes assigned to the one index value IV may be set at the same time as the winning combination. For example, by assigning a BB prize and a bell prize to one index value IV, the BB prize and the bell prize may be set at the same time as a winning combination, or a watermelon prize and a replay prize may be set to one index value IV. By being assigned, the watermelon prize and the replay prize may be set at the same time as the winning combination. Here, if the BB prize that is carried over to the next game when the prize is not established and another prize mode that is not carried over to the next game (for example, a bell prize) are set as winning combinations at the same time, the next game is entered. The sliding table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish the winning establishment in the other winning modes, and the BB winning can be carried over to the next game to establish the winning establishment. In addition, if a watermelon prize and a replay prize are set as winners at the same time, a slide table is prepared so that either the watermelon prize or the replay prize stops on the valid line, and this is a slide table. It may be stored in the storage area 106b. As this sliding table, it is possible to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize, which is more advantageous to the player than the replay prize, from the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In that case, the stop mode is specified so that it stops at the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize, and if the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize cannot be stopped, it stops at the stop symbol corresponding to the replay prize. It is preferable to use the one whose aspect is defined. As a result, the watermelon prize, which is more advantageous to the player than the replay prize, can be established as much as possible, and when the watermelon prize cannot be established, the replay prize can be established. Then, in this case, the player can be replayed without inserting a medal.

In the first embodiment, when a game is played with one card, a 7-bell prize is established, and two medals are paid out, the game state of the slot machine 10 remains the general game state, but 1 When the game is played with cards and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to the special gaming state when two medals are hung. Then, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state when two cards are hung, even if the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode when two cards are hung is set higher than that in the general gaming state. Good. As a result, if two medals are paid out due to the establishment of a 7-bell prize when one is hung, the player is strong in establishing a cherry-bell prize in which the two medals are inserted and three medals are paid out. You can enjoy another game even more while having a sense of expectation.

In the first embodiment, when the game is in a general gaming state, the specified number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3, and the number of medals can be set to 1 to 3, 2 or 3 , The case where the game is configured to start the game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of medals bets is set to 1 and 3, and 1 and 3 medals are hung. It may be configured to start the game only correspondingly. As a result, if two medals remain in the player's hand, the player is expected to pay out three medals by winning the Cherry Bell prize, and the remaining medals are inserted one by one. You can entertain at least two games in total.

In addition, not only in the general game state, but also in the bonus state, the specified number of medals bets is set to 1 to 3, and it corresponds to any of 1-card, 2-card, and 3-card. And may be configured to start the game. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the specified number of bets on medals may be set to 1 and 3, and the game may be started corresponding to 1 and 3 medals. .. If the game is played with one or two cards in the bonus state, the winning probability of cherry bell winning and 7 bell winning is set low, or the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability is zero. May be good. Further, the lottery table may be configured so that the winning probability of the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the one-sheet and two-sheet hanging is higher than the winning probability in the general gaming state. Further, the number of medals paid out for watermelon winning or bell winning in the one-sheet and two-sheet hanging may be set to be larger than the number of medals paid out in the general game state (3 medals). However, the winning probability of each winning mode and the number of medals to be paid out are such that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game in the one-card and two-cards in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the three-cards. May be configured to be set. As a result, the player can be made to play the bonus game with three cards as much as possible. In addition, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each winning mode when the game is played with one or two medals in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the general game state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1-card and 2-card, so if the game is repeated with 1-card or 2-card, the number of medals On the contrary, it decreases. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a bonus game with three cards.

In the first embodiment described above, not only the remaining number of medals in the player's hand but also the case where the game is configured to be played by one or two medals in a general gaming state has been described. Not necessarily limited to this, but only when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is less than 3, the winning mode and winning probability of the above-mentioned first embodiment can be achieved by multiplying one or two medals. And the game may be configured to be played with the number of medals paid out. For example, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the number of bets is a specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is 3. In the above case, by setting the specified number of bets to 3, the game can be played only by multiplying 3 cards, and if the value of the credit counter is less than 3, the specified number of bets is set to 1 and By setting the number of medals to two, the game may be played with the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out according to the first embodiment. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played only with three medals, so that the medals are consumed quickly and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be surely increased. .. On the other hand, if the number of virtual medals is less than 3, the one or two medals will be used to win a cherry bell prize in which three medals are paid out or a seven bell prize in which two medals are paid out. Since the player can be aimed at playing the game, the slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up all the medals.

In the first embodiment, the winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals paid out are fixed, not limited to the remaining number of medals in the player's hand, but in the general game state, the winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals paid out are fixed. Although the case where it is configured to be is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), when it is determined that there is a start command, the value of the credit counter immediately before the start command (that is, the number of virtual medals) is temporarily held in the RAM 106. When setting a one-card lottery table (see S406) or a two-card lottery table (see S405) in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), a payout determination is made. When processing (see S513), if the number of virtual medals immediately before the temporarily stored start command is 3 or more, medals are paid out per game with 1 or 2 medals. The winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals to be paid out are set so that the expected value of the number of medals is smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals to be paid out as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9. It may be configured. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the winning probability of the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning when the game is played with one or two cards low. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, it is possible to play the game with three medals under much more advantageous conditions than when playing the game with one or two medals. The player will play the game with three cards, and the medals will be consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to surely increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is less than 3, the winning mode shown in FIGS. 7 and 9 is used for the game played with one or two medals. , The winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out may be set. As a result, if the number of virtual medals is less than 3, the one or two medals will be used to win the Cherry Bell prize, in which three medals are paid out, or the Seven Bell prize, in which two medals are paid out. Since the player can be made to play the game aiming at the above, the slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up all the medals.

Further, in addition to the above two modified examples, or separately from the above two modified examples, when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is two, the above-mentioned FIG. The game may not be played based on the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out as shown in 9. In this case, the game may not be played by playing one card at all, or the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game by playing one card is the winning mode shown in FIGS. 7 and 9. The winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning probability and the number of medals paid out. In the former case, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the number of bets is the specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is confirmed. If is 2, the specified number of bets may be set to 2, so that the game with one bet cannot be played. Further, in the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter immediately before the start command (that is, the number of virtual medals) is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), the lottery table (see S406) for hanging one medal is set, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination process (see S513) is performed. In this case, when the number of virtual medals immediately before the temporarily stored start command is two, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game for one medal is shown in FIGS. 7 and 9. The winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the indicated winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals paid out. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can play the game with two medals. Therefore, it is possible to decide whether or not three medals will be paid out in one game.

In the first embodiment, even if the game is played with one or two cards when the BB winning winning flag is carried over, the winning mode and winning of the game played by the one or two cards are played. Although the case where the probability is configured to be the same as the case where the BB winning winning flag is not carried over has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the lottery table for 1-card (see S406) or the lottery table for 2-card (see S405) is set in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), the winning flag storage area 106a is carried over from the previous game. If the BB winning winning flag is set, the lottery table may be set so that the probability of losing is high. As a result, if the result of the lottery is not correct, only the BB winning winning flag carried over is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, so that the sliding table setting executed by S310 of the lottery process (see FIG. 14) is set. In the process, the slide table corresponding to the BB prize can be stored. Therefore, the probability that the BB prize will be established can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the case where the information regarding the number of bets is included in the start command and transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is different from the start command. Information on the number of bets may be transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command. For example, information on the number of bets may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter, referred to as "number of bets notification command"), or may be included in the lottery result command and transmitted. When the bet number notification command is prepared, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a in the main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, and the command is the bet number notification. If it is a command, the bet number notification command processing is executed, the bet number notification command processing extracts information on the bet number included in the bet number notification command, and the extracted bet number information is stored in the bet number storage area. It may be stored in 185b. When the lottery result command includes information on the number of bets, the lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) extracts the information on the number of bets from the lottery result command and stores the number of bets before the processing of S901 is performed. It may be stored in the area 185b. When the information on the number of bets is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command different from the start command and the lottery result command, the timing of transmitting the command is the lottery result command after the start command is transmitted. It is preferable that it is before the transmission of. As a result, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by the operation of the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed on the game, the auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, The mode of various effects performed by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65) can be determined, and the player can play the game with various expectations by the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU181 of the display control device 81, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command determines the BB winning mode. In the case of a plurality of winning combinations including, the auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is started so as to give priority to the BB winning notification effect for notifying that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. ) Has been described (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 20), but when there are two winning combinations notified by the lottery result command, the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode and the watermelon The auxiliary production unit may be controlled to start the "BB prize / watermelon prize notification production" that announces that two of the winning modes are set as winning combinations. In addition, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the bell winning mode, it is announced that the two winning combinations, the BB winning mode and the bell winning mode, are set as the winning combination. The auxiliary production unit may control to start the "BB prize / bell prize notification production". As a result, when the "BB prize / watermelon prize notification production" or "BB prize / bell prize notification production" is executed in the auxiliary production unit, the player can simultaneously perform the BB prize mode and the watermelon prize mode or the bell prize mode. It is possible to grasp that it is set as a winning combination. Therefore, for the game in which the notification effect is performed, it is possible to induce the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in the subsequent games. It is possible to let the player continue the game with a sense of expectation that the above will be established.

In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU181 of the display control device 81, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode. If there is, the case of performing the BB winning notification effect of notifying that the BB winning mode is the winning combination has been described, but as a candidate for the winning combination when the number of bets is one or two, the special game state is set. When a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations for giving the privilege to be transferred are provided, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is in a predetermined state. If it is determined that a transition winning combination is included, a notification effect for notifying that the predetermined state transition winning combination is a winning combination is sent to the auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). It may be controlled to execute. It should be noted that the predetermined state transition winning combination for which the notification effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of state transition winning combinations, or may be all the winning combinations.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command wins the watermelon. In the case of the mode or the bell winning mode, the case of performing the watermelon winning notification effect or the bell winning notification effect to announce that the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode is the winning combination has been described, but the number of bets is one or two. If other winning combinations that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44 are provided as candidates for the winning combination when the number of cards is the same, the MPU181 of the display control device 81 In the lottery result command processing executed by, if it is determined that the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is a winning combination that may be missed, a notification that the winning combination is a winning combination is announced. The effect may be controlled to be executed by the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). If there are a plurality of winning combinations that may be missed, the notification effect may be executed only when some of the winning combinations are won, or for any of the winning combinations. On the other hand, when the winning combination is won, the announcement effect may be executed.

The stop symbol of each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the stop symbol. However, it is desirable that the symbols that are not missed are set as the stop symbols for the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize.

The probability of winning each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the winning probability. Further, the number of medals paid out for watermelon winning and bell winning in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the number of medals paid out. However, it is desirable that the probability of winning the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is higher than that of other winning modes in the one-card or two-card hanging. In addition, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out for each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100% in one-card or two-card hang. It is desirable to do.

In the first embodiment described above, a slot machine in which three reels are provided in parallel and five reels are provided as effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having three effective lines. Further, the effective line may be changed according to the number of bets. For example, if the number of bets is 3, the valid line is set to 5 lines, if the number of bets is 2, the valid line is set to 3 lines, and if the number of bets is 1, the valid line is set. May be set to one line. When setting the effective lines to 3 lines, for example, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 shown in FIG. 6 may be set, or the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, may be set. The upper right line L5 may be set.

In the first embodiment, the case where the maximum number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum number of bets may be set to an arbitrary value of two or more. For example, the maximum number of bets may be four. In this case, if the game is played with a bet number less than the maximum bet number, the winning probability of each winning mode should be set so that the winning mode in which the maximum bet number (or a multiple thereof) is paid out is likely to be won. Just do it. In addition, when the maximum number of bets is 4, if the game is played with one medals, for example, the winning mode in which two medals are paid out is won with a high probability. If the probability is set and the game is played with two medals, for example, the winning probability of each winning mode in two medals is set so that the winning mode in which three medals are paid out is won with a high probability, and three medals are set. When the game is played by hanging, for example, the winning probability of each winning mode in the three medals may be set so that the winning mode in which four medals are paid out is won with a high probability. In this way, when the number of bets is small, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% by setting the number of medals to be paid out in the winning mode with a high probability to be small. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out in each winning mode so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the second embodiment, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435. Transferred to the variable image area 435b when the power is turned on, and after the transfer is completed, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. However, the case is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 314, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 281, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 200 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 431 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 435b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 435b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the second embodiment, the case where the effect execution time table defines the content (display content) of the image to be displayed at the time corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds has been described. The display content is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 281 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 281 is 1/30. Since one frame of the image is displayed every second, the effect execution timetable may specify the display content at every 1/30 second interval.

Further, in the effect execution time table, as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the character in which the image data corresponding to the image type is stored is not specified by the code associated with each image type. It may specify the address of ROM 434. In the display control device 314, since the image data corresponding to the image type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is read from the character ROM 434, the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the image type is stored in association with each image type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data corresponding to the image type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the effect execution time table, it can be associated with each image type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the code and the address of the character ROM 434, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the transfer command specified in the effect execution timetable, the address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the target image is stored may be specified instead of specifying the transfer target image type with a code. .. As a result, the image data transfer command can be generated by using the address specified by the transfer command as it is, so that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the transfer target image type is specified by the code. it can. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the target image to be transferred specified by the transfer command in the image transfer setting process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 is the first priority image. (S3002) and the process of determining whether or not the image is the second priority image (S3007) are the address specified by the transfer command and the character ROM 434 in which the first priority image or the second priority image is stored. It may be done by direct comparison with the address.

In the second embodiment, two areas (first priority image A area 436a and first priority image B area 436b) are provided as areas for storing the first priority image data in the normal video RAM 436. The number of may be set as appropriate. Similarly, the number of areas for storing the second priority image data and the number of areas for storing the normal image data may be appropriately set. Further, the number of areas for storing the first priority image data, the number of areas for storing the second priority image data, and the number of areas for storing the normal image data may be different from each other. Further, the third priority image data may be set from the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436, and one or more areas for storing the third priority image data may be provided.

When three or more areas for storing the first priority image data are set, the first priority image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the first priority image storage flag 433d, a first priority image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the first priority image storage counter is updated every time the first priority image data is stored. The first priority image data may be stored in the area designated by the first priority image storage counter.

Similarly, when three or more areas for storing normal image data are set, the normal image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the normal image storage flag 433d, a normal image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the normal image storage counter is updated every time the normal image data is stored, and is designated by the normal image storage counter. It may be configured to store normal image data in an area.

Further, when three or more areas for storing the second priority image data are set, the second priority image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the second priority image storage flag 433d, a second priority image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the second priority image storage counter is updated every time the second priority image data is stored. The second priority image data may be stored in the area specified by the second priority image storage counter. Further, when the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the 1 area where the second priority image data is stored, the second priority image storage indicating the area where the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored The value of the counter is stored, and the value of the second priority image storage counter indicating the area in which the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored is skipped until the continuous advance notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. The priority image storage counter may be updated. As a result, the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect can be held in the area where the second priority image data is stored without being overwritten until the continuous advance notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the second embodiment, the image type determined to be the first priority image data or the second priority image data is an example, and the first priority image data or the second priority image data or the second priority image data is set in the development stage according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 200. An image type that is determined to be priority image data may be appropriately selected.

In the second embodiment, the case where the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the area where the second priority image data is stored in the display control device 314 has been described, but instead of this, the normal image data is used. It may be configured to be stored in the storage area. In this case, the area in which the normal image data in which the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored may be controlled so as not to be overwritten until the continuous advance notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. As a result, the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect can be kept in the area where the normal image data is stored until the continuous advance notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 45), the continuous notice setting command is transmitted to the display control device 314 and displayed. The control device 314 has described a case where the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 as a trigger of receiving the continuous advance notice setting command. However, the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is used. The timing of transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the display control device 314 receives the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) from the voice lamp control device 313, the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by the "continuous advance notice execution setting" of the display variation pattern command. If the continuous advance notice effect image of the mode shown in the "continuous advance notice mode" is not stored in the normal video RAM 436, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. You may want to transfer to. As a result, the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the normal video RAM 436 in advance before the continuous advance notice effect is performed during the variable display. Therefore, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used. Therefore, the image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the execution timing of the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, in this case, when the continuous notice mode is a step-up type effect mode, all the image data corresponding to the continuous notice mode that may be used thereafter is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. You may do so. For example, if the continuous notice mode is "egg", "egg", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" may be used as the subsequent continuous notice mode. All the image data to be generated may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. In addition, when the continuous notice mode is "chicken", "chicken" and "chicken group" may be used as the subsequent continuous notice mode, so all the image data corresponding to them may be obtained from the character ROM 434. It may be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. As a result, it is not necessary to transfer the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 each time the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is started, so that the processing of the display control device 314 is reduced. Can be planned.

In the second embodiment, the display variation pattern command may include the remaining number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect. As a result, the display control device 314 uses the remaining number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect indicated by the display variation pattern command, and the remaining number of executions is 1 or more without counting the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect. In this case, it is possible to control the display control device 314 so that the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect stored in the normal video RAM 436 is not overwritten. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 314 can be reduced. Further, by including the remaining number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect in the display variation pattern command, the display control device 314 uses the "continuous advance notice mode" of the display variation pattern command and the remaining number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect. It is possible to more accurately grasp the continuous notice mode used in the continuous notice effect. For example, if the continuous notice mode is "egg" and the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect is 3, it is understood that "egg", "chick", and "chicken group" are used as the subsequent continuous notice mode. can do. Therefore, in this case, when the display control device 314 receives the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) from the voice lamp control device 313, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is transmitted from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Further, from the "continuous notice mode" of the variable pattern command for display and the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice mode used in the subsequent continuous notice effect is grasped and the continuous notice mode is grasped. It is also possible to configure all the image data used in the grasped continuous advance notice mode to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

In the second embodiment, when the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is transferred to the normal video RAM 436, the display control device 314 is connected to the normal video RAM 436 until the continuous advance notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. The configuration is such that the stored image data used for the continuous advance notice effect is not overwritten, but instead of this, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 each time the continuous advance notice effect is executed. If the image data to be used in the continuous advance notice effect to be displayed is stored, the transfer of the image data to be used in the continuous advance notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 has not been executed. On the other hand, if the image data to be used in the continuous advance notice effect to be displayed is not stored, the image data to be used in the continuous advance notice effect to be displayed is controlled to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. It may be configured to be used. As a result, only when the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is overwritten before the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is used again for normal use. Since it is transferred to the video RAM 436, the display control device is compared with the case where the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect is transferred to the normal video RAM 436 each time the variable effect set to execute the continuous advance notice effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the increase in the processing load of 314. Further, since the image used in the continuous advance notice effect is surely transferred to the normal video RAM 436, the continuous advance notice effect can be displayed on the third display device 281 without delay.

In the second embodiment, when the display control device 314 receives the display variation pattern command from the voice lamp control device 313, the display variation pattern command is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to the display variation pattern command. The effect execution timetable used in is stored in the effect execution timetable storage area 432a based on the information of the display variation pattern command "variation pattern setting", "continuous notice execution setting", and "continuous notice execution mode". The case where one is selected from a plurality of timetables and stored in the work RAM has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as an effect execution timetable used for the effect execution timetable executed for the received display variation pattern command, from among a plurality of other effect execution timetables stored in the effect execution timetable storage area 432a, for display. One timetable corresponding to the "variation pattern setting" of the variation pattern command is selected and stored in the work RAM, and further, the setting to execute the continuous rehearsal effect in the "continuous notice execution setting" of the variation pattern command for display is set. If it has been done, the information instructing the display of the continuous notice effect according to the "continuous notice mode" of the display variation pattern command corresponds to the display timing for the effect execution timetable stored in the work RAM. You may add it to the place where you want to. In addition, display information of various other effects may be added to the selected effect execution timetable at a location corresponding to the display timing of the effect. As a result, the effect execution time table storage area 432a may be provided with an effect execution time table corresponding to the "variation pattern setting" of the display variation pattern command. Therefore, the capacity of the effect execution time table storage area 432a It is possible to suppress the increase, and by adding the additional processing to the effect execution timetable, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the second embodiment, the image type of the first priority image data stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b is stored, and the second priority image C area 436c and the second The image type of the second priority image data stored in the priority image D area 436d is stored, and the first priority image data ("super reach A", "super reach B", "notice effect A", "notice effect" is stored. It becomes necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the second priority image data ("Super Reach C" to "Super Reach E", "Notice Effect A" to "Notice Effect B") to the normal video RAM 436. In that case, the image data of the target image to be transferred becomes the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, or the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. If it is stored, the case where the image data of the target image is not transferred to the normal video RAM 436 and the drawing process is already performed using the image of the normal video RAM 436 has been described. , The image type of the normal image data stored in the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g is stored, and when the normal image is the transfer target, the normal image data is the normal image F area 436f or the normal image. If it is stored in the G area 436g, the drawing process may be performed using the image of the normal video RAM 436 without transferring the image data of the target image to the normal video RAM 436. As a result, if the normal image is stored in the normal video RAM 436, it is possible to prevent the normal image data from being duplicately transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

Further, the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 for all the image types (effect components such as "super reach A" and "notice effect C") displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Information that can be identified as to whether or not the image is stored in the work RAM 433 may be stored. Then, when a predetermined image type becomes the target image to be transferred, it is determined from the identification information stored in the work RAM 433 whether or not the image data corresponding to the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436. If it is not stored in the normal video RAM 436, the image data may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. In this case, the identification information of the image type corresponding to the transferred image data is updated to the information indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436, and is overwritten and erased by the transfer of the image data. The identification information of the image type corresponding to the image data may be updated to information indicating that the corresponding image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 436. On the other hand, when a predetermined image type is the target image to be transferred and the corresponding image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 according to the identification information of the image type, the character ROM 434 is transferred to the normal video RAM 436. It is also possible to perform the drawing process using the image of the normal video RAM 436 without performing the transfer process of the image data. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 from being duplicated and repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the MPU 431 and reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state.

In the second embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 281 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 200 includes the third symbol display device. A fourth symbol display device different from 281 is provided, and a continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 281. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 314 or the voice lamp control device 313. Further, the pachinko machine 200 may be provided with an accessory that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined mode in combination with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200 under the control of the voice lamp control device 313, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 200 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 281 (and the first symbol display device 237) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 426, or the illumination units 229 to 233 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 281 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 426, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice production can be easily continued by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 426, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 426 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 313, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 200 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 310, causes the voice lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 281, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, and the sound from the voice output device 426. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. In addition, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 281, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 426, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233). Or, by changing the combination of them), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, loss) after the end of the continuous advance notice production are prepared. Good.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The combination of predetermined symbols (for example, the combination of symbols on the middle line L2 is "3", "4", "1" is not limited, and the continuous advance notice effect is a stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is completed. It may be done by displaying the so-called "chance eye" which is "). In this case, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is not 0 (that is, the continuous advance notice effect is executed) in the process of S2205 of the variation display process (see FIG. X47) executed by the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313. May set a chance eye as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect. As a result, if the third symbol display device 281 continuously displays the chance eyes as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained. ..

In the second embodiment, in the main control device 310, when the result of the lottery for the starting winning ball is a big hit and the display mode is the 15R probability variation big hit, and the result of the lottery for the starting winning ball is out of order. In addition, when the display mode is out of front and back reach, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "1", and the permission to start the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp. The case of notifying the device 313 has been described (see S1405 to S1410 in FIG. 37), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the condition for setting the continuous notice permission flag to “1” is in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 200. , It may be set as appropriate. For example, the continuous notice permission flag may be set to "1" when the result of the lottery at the time of the start winning is a big hit, and the continuous notice permission flag may be set to "0" when the result is not. As a result, it is suggested to the player that if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed together with all the pending variation effects, the final variable effect that has been reserved will surely be a big hit. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player.

In addition, when the result of the lottery at the time of starting prize is a big hit and the game state obtained as a result is a specific type, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "1". It may be set. As a result, for example, if the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1" only in the case of a big hit (15R probability variation big hit), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the continuous notice effect is the third symbol. When displayed on the display device 281, the player can have a high expectation.

In the second embodiment, when the main control device 310 determines whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect (see S1405 to S1410 in FIG. 37), and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted (hold count command). When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of is set to "1"), in the voice lamp control device 313, the continuous notice effect is produced according to the continuous notice determination probability set by the continuous notice determination table 422a. Although the case where the presence / absence of execution is determined has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous notice determination table is stored in the ROM 402 of the main control device 310, and the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect in the main control device 310. May be decided. In this case, the hold count command may be used to instruct the voice lamp control device 313 to execute the continuous advance notice effect from the main control device 310.

Further, the lottery result (big hit, miss) determined by the main control device 310 when the ball is started and won by the hold count command or following the hold count command, and if the lottery result is a big hit, the winning type (15R) Probability change jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot), and if the lottery result is out of order, the final stop pattern (front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete reach) is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the audio lamp control device 313. Based on this information, the voice lamp control device 313 may determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect and determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Alternatively, the main control of each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 when the ball starts and wins a prize by the hold count command or following the hold count command. It may be transmitted from the device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 may determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed. In these cases, since the main control device 310 does not determine whether or not to allow the continuous advance notice effect to be executed, the processing load applied to the main control device 310 can be further reduced, and the start prize is won. It is possible to prevent delays and malfunctions in the lottery process performed on the ball.

In the second embodiment, the case where the permission to start the continuous notice effect determined by the main control device 310 is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command. As described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and a continuous advance notice permission command for notifying the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect may be prepared separately from the hold count command. Further, in the second embodiment, the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit”,” which is notified to the voice lamp control device 313 by the 0th bit (game state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command. "Off") may be included in the continuous advance notice permission command and transmitted. In these cases, only when the main control device 310 determines that the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted, the continuous notice permission command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 following the hold count command, or the continuous notice may be sent. The permission command may be configured to notify the presence or absence of permission to start the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice permission command may always be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 following the hold count command.

In the second embodiment, different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each other depending on the game state (“big hit”, “off”) after the end of the continuous notice effect and the number of times the variable effect held in the main control device 310 is held. The case of changing the continuous advance notice determination probability has been described using the continuous advance notice determination table 422a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the game state (“big hit”, “missing”) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. The continuous advance notice determination probability is changed by using the continuous advance notice determination table in which different continuous advance notice determination ranges are associated with each other according to only one of the hold count of the variation effect held in the main control device 310. May be good. Further, when associating different continuous notice determination ranges according to the number of holds, the number of holds may be divided into several groups and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group, or the number of holds may be less than a predetermined number. In the case of, the continuous advance notice determination range may not be set so that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined. In the latter case, when it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously performed together with the reserved variable effect of a predetermined number of times or more. As a result, the player can recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more, so that the effect different from the normal effect is performed, which is special to the player. You can have a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment described above, in the continuous notice determination table, a case where different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with two states of "big hit" and "missing" as game states after the end of the continuous notice effect has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each state of "15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "time saving jackpot", and "off". Further, these states may be divided into several groups, and different continuous advance notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. As a result, for example, if the continuous advance notice determination range is associated with each game state so that the continuous advance notice determination probability increases in the order of "15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "time saving jackpot", and "off". , If a continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the pending variation effects, it is highly possible that the gaming state will be more advantageous for the player after the last pending variation effect is completed. It can be suggested that. Therefore, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In this modification, the main control device 310 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice is started, or the voice lamp control device 313 directly starts the continuous advance notice without determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect in the main control device 310. If the result of the lottery is "big hit" in the main control device 310, it is useful in determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the second embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is an audio lamp based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out of reach) determined by the main control device 310. The case where the setting is made by the control device 313 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 313 decides to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the last suspended variable effect is stopped. If the symbol is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing it with a stop symbol in the front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol defined by the main control device 310. In this case, for example, in the variation display process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313, in the process of setting the stop symbol of the variation effect (S2205), the stop symbol of the variation effect is out of alignment. It is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c (that is, the last variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed), and the result is If the stop symbol of the variation effect is out of order, and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c, the stop symbol is out of front and back in the processing of S2205. The corresponding stop symbol may be set. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control device 310, but always has a front-rear out-of-front reach, which gives the player a high expectation. be able to.

In the second embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the pending variation effects, each variation effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each variation. , Not necessarily limited to this, when a continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the pending variation effects, the effect mode of the variation effect other than the last pending variation effect should be updated to the out-of-order variation effect. It may be configured as.

In this case, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is 0 (that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not performed), or the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0, and the value is the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c. If they are equal (that is, if it is the last variation effect for performing the continuous advance notice effect), the variation effect of the mode set in the processing of S2205 (see FIG. 47) based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 310 is applied. In addition, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and is not equal to the value of the continuous advance notice number register 423c (that is, it is not the last variable effect for performing the continuous advance notice effect). In the case), instead of the variation effect of the mode set in the process of S2205 (see FIG. 47), the deviation variation effect is set, and then the execution of the continuous notice effect is set in addition to the deviation variation effect. May be good. When the stop symbol after the variation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the variation effect is not updated, and it is set by the process of S2205 (see FIG. 47) based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 310. The effect mode of the variable effect may be displayed as it is.

Here, even if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result even though the corresponding variation effect mode is, for example, the super reach variation effect, the player's expectation However, it is executed last because the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed and the variable effect other than the last executed variable effect is continuously performed in the off-variable effect. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the variable production.

In the second embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 281 when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example. When the frame button 222 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281.

In the second embodiment, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the fluctuation effect is executed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. ..

In the second embodiment described above, the case where one first ball entry port 264, which starts a big hit lottery when a ball enters the game board 213, has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 213, respectively, in which the ball entry is detected independently and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold count command transmitted by the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port is information indicating which first ball entry port is the hold. May be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, a hold count counter is prepared for each first entry port, and when a hold count command is received, the hold for the first entry port indicated by the hold count command is held. When the number of holds is set in the number counter and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold count counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the number of holds is counted for each first entry port. can do.

When a plurality of first entry ports are provided, the continuous advance notice number register 223c and the continuous advance notice number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 313 are the maximum number of holds that can be held by all the first entry ports. For the variable effect (holding ball) of minutes (that is, the number of times obtained by adding the maximum number of holdings that can be held by each first entrance), the number of executions is set so that the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. , It may also be configured so that it can be counted. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 313 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the hold count command is received, the variable effect (holding ball) held by all the first entrances at that time is held. The number of times may be calculated by adding the values of all the hold count counters corresponding to each first entrance, and the calculated value may be stored in the continuous advance notice number register 223c. As a result, at the time when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over the variable effect held by all the first entrances.

Further, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of first entrances are provided and the variation effect held in one first entry port is preferentially executed, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be decided only when the ball is entered into the first entrance. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, so that the continuous advance notice effect is given to the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with high priority, it is possible to prevent the situation where the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily.

In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value of the hold count counter 423a is reduced by 1 (see S2207 in FIG. 47). , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing executed by the MPU 401 of the main control unit 310 (see FIG. 35), the hold count counter of the main control unit 310 is subtracted as the variation pattern command is set by the variation start processing (S1206). A hold count command is set so that the value (N) of 403a is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 (see S1204 in FIG. 35), and the hold count command is the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313 together with the above. In this case, S2207 in FIG. 47 is omitted. Further, when the value (N) of the subtracted hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 is transmitted, the hold count command so that the continuous notice permission flag and the game status flag after the continuous notice are both "0". Just generate a command. That is, the value (N) of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command set by the change start process (S1206) is the voice lamp from the main control device 310 by the hold count command. When transmitting to the control device 313, the continuous advance notice effect flag is set to "0". In other words, the continuous advance notice effect flag is set to "1" under predetermined conditions only when the winning of the first ball entrance is detected and the value (N) of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 is added. Is set to, and the main control device 310 notifies the voice lamp control device 313 of permission for the continuous advance notice effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, the determination as to whether or not the main control device 310 allows the voice lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous advance notice effect is when the first ball entrance 264 is won. The relationship between the judgment of whether or not to allow the continuous advance notice production and the number of pending variable productions that increase due to the winning of the first ball opening 264 is determined by winning the first ball opening 264. It can be accurately transmitted to the voice lamp control device 313 in synchronization with.

In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the hold count command is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, it may be further decided whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. .. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have an expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance notice effect, and the effect that does not make the player bored is performed. Can be done. In this case, the MPU 421 of the voice lamp control device 313 updates each time the variation display process (see FIG. 47) is executed, and provides a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect. You may. Then, in the variation display processing, when the variation start flag is on, the value of the continuous advance notice counter 423d is other than 0, and it is for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect. If the value of the counter is a predetermined value, the continuous advance notice effect execution may be set for the corresponding variable effect. Further, in this case, the number (range) of a predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the hold count counter 423a when determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d, the continuous notice number register 423c, and the continuous notice number counter 423d. Difference (that is, the number of times the remaining continuous advance notice effect is executed), the content of the effect mode of the variable effect for which the judgment is made (super reach variable effect, normal reach variable effect, off variation effect), and the gaming state after the end of the series of continuous advance notice effect. (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, miss), or a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. ..

In the second embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the voice lamp control device 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 gives a display instruction to the display control device 314. , The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

In the second embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 264 and the passage of the second ball opening 267 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to 4. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of holdings of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 264 is different by the number of holdings in a part of the third symbol display device 281 or by the number of times of holding the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 237, and the light emitting member notifies the number of hold times. You may.

Further, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as identification information is scrolled in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. , The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, and a type equipped with a CT game. In any case, it is clear that the same action and effect as those of the above-mentioned first embodiment are exhibited. Examples of the bonus winning in each of these types include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, and CT winning.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the second embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the game machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

It includes a main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means that displays an image based on the control by the sub control means. The sub-control means is a slot machine capable of performing a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means in which image information for displaying an image in the image display means is stored and the first storage means thereof. Yes, it is displayed on the image display means based on a second storage means having a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means and at least the image information stored in the second storage means. An image control means for controlling the image to be to be generated and a first transfer process for transferring the image information stored in the first storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power are executed. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined opportunity is settled. Slot machine 1 characterized by the above.

The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all the image information stored in the first storage means, or some images. It may be information.

According to the slot machine 1, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image information stored in the first storage means is turned on. Is transferred by the first transfer processing executing means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means. Then, in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means is held at least until a predetermined opportunity is set, and the first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image control means, the image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display the image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.

It includes a main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means that displays an image based on the control by the sub control means. The sub-control means can be read out at a higher speed than the first storage means in which image information for displaying an image in the image display means is stored and the first storage means thereof. Yes, it is displayed on the image display means based on a second storage means having a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means and at least the image information stored in the second storage means. An image control means for controlling the image to be to be generated and a first transfer process for transferring the image information stored in the first storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power are executed. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined opportunity is settled. A game machine A1 characterized by the fact that.

The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all the image information stored in the first storage means, or some images. It may be information.

According to the game machine A1, in the sub-control means, the image information for displaying the image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image information stored in the first storage means is turned on. Is transferred by the first transfer processing executing means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means. Then, in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means is held at least until a predetermined opportunity is set, and the first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image control means, the image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display the image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.

In the game machine A1, the sub-control means can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and has a third storage area having a second storage area for storing image information stored in the first storage means. The image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, and the first transfer process is performed. A part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power, and the sub-control means When the image information that has not been transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the third storage means from the first storage means before the image information is used. A game machine A2 comprising a second transfer processing execution means for executing a second transfer processing for transferring the image information to the second storage area of the means.

According to the game machine A2, a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. The image information transferred by the image information is retained in the first storage area of the second storage means, at least until a predetermined momentum is reached. On the other hand, when the image information that has not been transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means is used for controlling the image by the image control means, the image information is transferred by the second transfer processing execution means before the image information is used. , Transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the image control means is transferred to the image information held in the second storage means and the third storage means capable of high-speed read operation even if the memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is controlled by using the image information, the image can be displayed at the desired time without any problem. Further, since a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage area of the second storage means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second storage means. can do.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the sub-control means includes a first determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the second storage means is read out by the image control means. The first transfer process stores the image information stored in the second storage means in the first storage means when it is determined by the first determination means that the image information stored in the second storage means is not read out by the image control means. The gaming machine B1 characterized in that the generated image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

According to the game machine B1, when the first determination means determines that the image information stored in the second storage means has not been read out by the image control means, the first transfer process is executed. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the transfer processing executing means, the image control means transfers the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer processing. While the influence of the transfer of the above is suppressed, the image to be displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing executing means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used. The image display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In the game machine A2, the sub-control means includes a second determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the third storage means is read out by the image control means, and the second determination means is provided. The transfer process is stored in the first storage means when it is determined by the second determination means that the image information stored in the third storage means is not read out by the image control means. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that image information is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine B2, when it is determined by the second determination means that the image information stored in the third storage means has not been read out by the image control means, the second transfer process is executed. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer processing executing means, the image control means transfers the image information to the third storage means by the second transfer processing. While the influence of the transfer of the above is suppressed, the image to be displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the third storage means. As a result, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing executing means, and the image information already stored in the third storage means is used. The image display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In the game machine B2, the sub-control means includes a first determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the second storage means is read out by the image control means, and the first determination means is provided. The transfer process is stored in the first storage means when it is determined by the first determination means that the image information stored in the second storage means is not read out by the image control means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

According to the game machine B3, when it is determined by the first determination means that the image information stored in the second storage means has not been read out by the image control means, the first transfer process is executed. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the transfer processing executing means, the image control means transfers the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer processing. While the influence of the transfer of the above is suppressed, the image to be displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing executing means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used. The image display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In the game machine B1 or B3, when the first determination means is in a state where the image control by the image control means is scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that it is determined that the image information stored in the second storage means is not read out by the image control means.

According to the game machine B4, when the image control by the image control means is in the state of scanning the area in the image scanning area of the image display means where the image to be displayed does not exist, the first determination means sets the image. (2) Since it is determined that the image information stored in the storage means has not been read out by the image control means, the determination can be easily performed from the control state of the image control means.

In the game machine B2, the second determination means is in a state where the image control by the image control means is scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where the image to be displayed does not exist. The gaming machine B5, characterized in that it is determined that the image information stored in the third storage means is not read out by the image control means.

According to the game machine B5, when the image control by the image control means is scanning the area of the image scanning area of the image display means where the image to be displayed does not exist, the second determination means sets the image. Since it is determined that the image information stored in the storage means has not been read out by the image control means, the determination can be easily performed from the control state of the image control means.

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, the sub-control device includes a fourth storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and the first transfer process is performed by the first transfer process. When the image information stored in the 1 storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred to the fourth storage means, and then the image information is transferred to the fourth storage means. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the image information transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

According to the game machine C1, when the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred. The image information transferred to the fourth storage means and then transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Here, since the fourth storage means is configured to be capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when the image information is transferred from the fourth storage means to the second storage means, it is directly from the first storage means. The transfer can be completed in a shorter time than when the image information is transferred to the second storage means. That is, since the time during which the second storage means is actually receiving the image information transfer can be shortened, the image control means suppresses the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process. In this state, it is possible to control the image to be displayed on the image display means while reading the image information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used for the image. The display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In any of the game machines A2, B2, B3, and B5, the sub-control device includes a fifth storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and the second transfer process is performed by the first storage means. 1 When the image information stored in the storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred to the fifth storage means, and then the image information is transferred to the fifth storage means. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the image information transferred to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine C2, when the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred. The image information transferred to the fifth storage means and then transferred to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. Here, since the fifth storage means is configured to be capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when the image information is transferred from the fifth storage means to the third storage means, the first storage means directly. The transfer can be completed in a shorter time than when the image information is transferred to the third storage means. That is, since the time during which the third storage means receives the transfer of the image information can be shortened, the image control means suppresses the influence of the transfer of the image information to the third storage means by the second transfer process. In this state, it is possible to control the image to be displayed on the image display means while reading the image information stored in the third storage means. Therefore, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing executing means, and the image information already stored in the third storage means is used for the image. The display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In the game machine C2, the sub-control device includes a fourth storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and the first transfer process is performed on image information stored in the first storage means. Was transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means was once transferred to the fourth storage means, and then transferred to the fourth storage means. The gaming machine C3, characterized in that the image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

According to the game machine C3, when the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred. The image information transferred to the fourth storage means and then transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Here, since the fourth storage means is configured to be capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when the image information is transferred from the fourth storage means to the second storage means, it is directly from the first storage means. The transfer can be completed in a shorter time than when the image information is transferred to the second storage means. That is, since the time during which the second storage means receives the transfer of the image information can be shortened, the image control means suppresses the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process. In this state, it is possible to control the image to be displayed on the image display means while reading the image information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used. The image display means can display a desired image at a desired time without any problem.

In C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the fourth storage means and the fifth storage means are composed of the same memory.

According to the game machine C4, since the fourth storage means and the fifth storage means are composed of the same memory, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the memory used for the sub control means.

In any of the game machines C1, C3, and C4, the sub-control means scans the image scanning area of the image display means in which the image to be displayed does not exist, in which the image control by the image control means does not exist. A third determination means for determining whether or not the image is in a state is provided, and the first transfer process scans an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when it is determined that the image information is in the above-mentioned state. The fourth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of image information to the second storage means while scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. A game machine C5 characterized by being an image.

According to the game machine C5, it is determined by the third determination means whether or not the image control by the image control means is scanning the area of the image scanning area of the image display means where the image to be displayed does not exist. Then, when it is determined by the third determination means that the image scanning area of the image display means is scanning an area in which the image to be displayed does not exist, the first transfer process is executed. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the processing execution means. Here, the fourth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of image information to the second storage means while scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. Therefore, in the transfer of image information from the fourth storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means, which is performed by the first transfer processing execution means, there is an image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display means. Can be completed while scanning an area that does not. Therefore, while scanning the area in which the image to be displayed exists in the image scanning area of the image display means, the image control means is in a state in which the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process is suppressed. Therefore, the image information stored in the second storage means can be read out to control the image.

In any of the game machines C2 to C4, the sub-control means is in a state where the image control by the image control means is scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. A third determination means for determining the presence or absence is provided, and the second transfer process scans an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. When it is determined that the image information is in the state, the image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means, and the fifth storage means. The storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of image information to the third storage means while scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. A game machine C6 characterized by being.

According to the game machine C6, it is determined by the third determination means whether or not the image control by the image control means is scanning the area of the image scanning area of the image display means where the image to be displayed does not exist. Then, when it is determined by the third determination means that the image scanning area of the image display means is scanning an area in which the image to be displayed does not exist, the second transfer process is executed. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the processing execution means. Here, the fifth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of image information to the third storage means while scanning an area of the image scanning area of the image display means where no image to be displayed exists. Therefore, in the transfer of image information from the fifth storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, which is performed by the second transfer processing execution means, there is an image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display means. Can be completed while scanning an area that does not. Therefore, while scanning the area of the image scanning area of the image display means in which the image to be displayed exists, the image control means is in a state in which the influence of the transfer of the image information to the third storage means by the second transfer process is suppressed. Then, the image information stored in the third storage means can be read out to control the image.

In any of the game machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C5, the sub-control means displays one of a plurality of types of back images on the image display means while moving one back image in a predetermined direction. Based on the rear image display means for causing the rear image and the second predetermined opportunity, the rear image display means changes the rear image displayed on the image display means, and the changed rear image is displayed from the predetermined position. The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process is provided in a predetermined direction with respect to each of the plurality of rear images. Of the range of images displayed on the image display means while being moved, an image included in at least a predetermined range from the predetermined position displayed as a rear image changed by the back image changing means is displayed on the image display means. A game machine D1 characterized by including image information necessary for making the image.

According to the game machine D1, one of a plurality of types of back images is displayed on the image display means while being moved in a predetermined direction by the back image display means. Then, based on the second predetermined opportunity, the back image displayed on the image display means by the back image display means is changed by the back image changing means, and the changed back image is displayed on the image display means from the predetermined position. To. Here, the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process includes an image displayed on the image display means while moving each of the plurality of back images in a predetermined direction. Of the range of, the image information necessary for causing the image display means to display an image included in at least a predetermined range from a predetermined position displayed as a rear image after the change by the back image changing means is included. As a result, the image control means transfers to the first storage area of the second storage means when the back image displayed on the image display means is changed by the back image display unit based on the second predetermined opportunity. Using the obtained image information, it is possible to immediately control the image display means to display the changed back image while moving it from a predetermined position to a predetermined range in a predetermined direction. Therefore, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, it is possible to immediately respond to the second predetermined opportunity and display the changed rear image on the image display device while moving it.

The term "predetermined range" is used to mean that when the rear image is displayed while being moved in a predetermined direction by the rear image display means, the remaining moving range is displayed while the predetermined range is displayed. The image information necessary for the above may be set within a range capable of being transferred from the first storage means to the second area of the third storage means.

Further, the "background A", "background B", and "background C" which are the background images described in the second embodiment correspond to the "back image" described in the game machine D1.

In the game machine D1, the plurality of types of rear images have initial positions set for each rear image, and the rear image changing means is displayed on the image display means by the rear image display means. When changing the rear image, the rear image after the change is displayed on the image display means from the initial position set in the rear image after the change as the predetermined position. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, the initial position is fixedly set for each back image, and when the back image to be displayed on the image display means is changed by the back image changing means, the changed back image. The rear image after the change from the initial position set to is displayed on the image display means. That is, since the display is always started from a fixed initial position, the image information necessary for displaying the image included in at least a predetermined range from the initial position on the image display means is second by the first transfer process. If it is included in the image information transferred to the first storage area of the storage means, the rear image after the change can be immediately displayed from the initial position. As described above, in order to display the image included in at least a predetermined range from the initial position on the image display means as the image information necessary for displaying the back image transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Since it can be limited to the necessary image information, the storage capacity of the first storage area of the second storage means can be kept small. Further, the transfer time from the first storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means can be shortened.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the second transfer process is performed by the back image changing means using the image information held in the first storage means of the second storage means for the image control means. While controlling the display of the changed back image while moving it from a predetermined position to the predetermined range in a predetermined direction, the rear image of the changed rear image that is not included in the predetermined range is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that the image information necessary for displaying the image is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine D3, the rear image changing means causes the image control means to change the rear image from a predetermined position to a predetermined range by using the image information held in the first storage means of the second storage means. The rear image after the change is not included in the predetermined range by the second transfer process executing means that executes the second transfer process while controlling the display while moving the image in a predetermined direction. The image information necessary for displaying the image is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, while the back image is moved from the predetermined position to the predetermined range in the predetermined direction and displayed on the image display means, the image information for displaying the remaining range is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means. Since it is stored, the back image of the remaining range following the predetermined range can be displayed on the image display means without delay.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the rear image display means sets a predetermined rear image among the plurality of rear images as the initial rear image to be displayed first after the power is turned on. The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the transfer process is all displayed while being moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the predetermined back image set as the initial back image. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that it includes image information necessary for displaying an image in the range of the above on the image display means.

According to the game machine D4, the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process is set as the initial rear image to be displayed first after the power is turned on by the rear image display means. It includes image information necessary for displaying an image in the entire range displayed while moving the predetermined back image in a predetermined direction on the image display means. Therefore, when the rear image display means changes to the initial rear image as the rear image displayed on the image display means based on the operation of the operation means by the player, the entire range displayed by moving in a predetermined direction is changed. The image can be displayed on the image display means by using the image information held in the first storage area of the second storage means. In that case, the second transfer process for displaying the initial rear image is executed. It is not necessary to make it necessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

The "background A" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the "initial back image" described in the game machine D4.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the sub-control means includes an operation means operated by the player, and the rear image changing means is described by the player as one of the second predetermined triggers. Based on the operation of the operation means, the back image display means changes the back image displayed on the image display means, and the changed back image is displayed on the image display means from a predetermined position. A game machine D5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D5, based on the operation means being operated by the player, the back image displayed on the image display means by the back image display means is changed by the back image changing means, and the changed back image is changed. It is displayed on the image display means from a predetermined position. As a result, the image control means is the first of the second storage means when the back image displayed on the image display means is changed by the back image display unit based on the operation of the operation means by the player. Using the image information transferred to the storage area, it is possible to immediately control the image display means to display the changed back image while moving it from a predetermined position to a predetermined range in a predetermined direction. Therefore, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, the rear image after the change can be displayed on the image display device while moving in response to the operation of the player immediately.

In any of the game machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C5, D1 to D5, the main control means is a detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the detection means satisfies the start condition. It has an acquisition means for acquiring random information when is detected, and a selection means for selecting a first mode of production, which is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The sub-control means causes the image display means to display the first effect based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. The game machine has a display means, and when a combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect displayed by the first effect display means appears, the game machine gives the player a predetermined game value. The main control means is provided by the effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect by the effect determining means. The sub-control means includes a permission transmission means for transmitting a permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect to the sub-control means when it is determined that the sub-control means is performed. Based on the storage means for storing the number of waiting times of the first effect displayed by, and the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means, the first number of times stored in the storage means is received. In each of the first effects, the setting means for setting the second effect to be feasible in addition to the first effect, and the first effect to which the second effect is added by the setting means are the first. 1 The effect display means includes a second effect display means for displaying the second effect on the image display means when the image display means displays the second effect, and the second transfer process is performed by the setting means. When the second effect is set to be feasible in addition to the first effect, the image data necessary for displaying the second effect added to the first effect on the image display means is displayed. A game machine E1 characterized by transferring from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine E1, the first mode of production is selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition in the main control means. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means as the first effect in the selected mode. Further, in the main control means, whether or not to perform a second effect different from the first effect is determined by the determination means, and as a result, when it is determined to perform the second effect, the second effect is performed. The permission command for permitting the execution of the effect of is transmitted to the sub control means by the permission transmission means of the main control means. On the other hand, when the establishment of the start condition is detected in the main control means, the first effect corresponding to the establishment of the start condition detected in the past is being displayed by the first effect display means of the sub control means. The first effect corresponding to the establishment of the detected start condition is waited for, and the number of times of waiting is stored in the storage means provided in the sub control means. Then, when the permission command transmitted from the main control means is received in the sub control means, in each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means, the second effect is added to the first effect. When the first effect, which is set by the setting means of the sub-control means and the second effect is added, is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means, the second effect is executed. Is displayed on the image display means by the second effect display means.

Here, when the second effect is set to be executable in addition to the first effect by the setting means, it is necessary for the image display means to display the second effect added to the first effect. The image data is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing execution means that executes the second transfer processing. As a result, the first effect to which the second effect is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means, and the second effect is displayed by the image display means by the second effect display means. In the case of making the image control means, the image control means can cause the image display means to display the second effect at a desired time without any problem based on the image data transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

The "variable effect (variable display)" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the "first effect" described in the game machine E1, and the "continuous notice effect" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the "continuous notice effect". , Corresponds to the "second production" described in the game machine E1. Further, the "third symbol" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the game machine E1, and the "big hit" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the game machine E1. Corresponding to the "predetermined game value", the "hold count command" described in the second embodiment corresponds to the "permission command" described in the game machine E1.

In the game machine E1, the setting means is such that the second effect is displayed on the image display means in a different manner in each of the first effects for the number of times of waiting to which the second effect is added. The second effect is set to be feasible, and when the second effect is set to be feasible in addition to the first effect by the setting means, each of the second transfer processes is set to be feasible. The first effect is obtained by determining the mode of the second effect added to the first effect, and displaying the image data required for displaying the second effect on the image display means in each of the determined modes. A gaming machine E2 characterized by transferring from a storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine E2, the second effect is displayed by the setting means so that the second effect is displayed on the image display means in a different manner in each of the first effects for the number of times the second effect is added. The production of is set to be feasible. At this time, the mode of the second effect added to each of the first effects is determined by the second transfer processing execution means, and the second effect is displayed on the image display means in each of the determined modes. The image data required for this purpose is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the first effect to which the second effect of each different mode is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means, and the second effect is displayed in the set mode. When displaying on the image display means by the effect display means, the image control means images the second effect in a desired mode at a desired time based on the image data transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. It can be displayed on the display means without any problem.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the setting means has different aspects depending on the number of waiting times stored in the storage means in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of times of waiting to which the second effect is added. The second effect is set to be feasible so that the effect of 2 is displayed on the image display means, and the second transfer process is performed by the setting means in addition to the first effect. When the second effect is set to be feasible, it is necessary to determine the number of waits stored in the storage means and display the second effect on the image display means according to the determination result. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that image data is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

According to the game machine E3, in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of waits to which the second effect is added, the second effect is displayed on the image display means in a different manner according to the number of waits stored in the storage means. The second effect is set to be feasible by the setting means. At this time, the second transfer processing executing means determines the number of times of waiting stored in the storage means, and the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means according to the determination result is the second. It is transferred from the 1 storage means to the 2nd storage area of the 3rd storage means. As a result, the first effect to which the second effect having a different mode according to the number of waits is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means, and the first effect is displayed in the form according to the number of waits. 2 When the second effect is displayed by the image display means by the effect display means, the image control means has the desired mode at a desired time based on the image data transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. The second effect can be displayed on the image display means without any problem.

In the game machine E1, when the second effect set by the setting means is displayed on the image display means by the second effect display means, the sub-control means determines the number of display times. The second transfer process is added to the first effect when the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the first, based on the determination by the display number determination means. The image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and based on the determination by the display number determination means. , When the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the second or later, the image data required to display the second effect added to the first effect on the image display means. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the transfer from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is not executed.

According to the game machine F1, when the second effect set by the setting means is displayed on the image display means by the second effect display means, the number of times of display is determined by the display number determination means, and based on the determination. When the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the first time, the image of the second effect added to the first effect by the second transfer process execution means that executes the second transfer process. The image data necessary for displaying on the display means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. On the other hand, when the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the second or later based on the determination by the display number determination means, the second transfer process execution means adds the first effect to the first effect. The transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the effect of 2 to the image display means from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is not executed. As a result, every time the second effect is displayed on the second effect display means, the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is repeatedly repeated from the first storage means to the third storage means. Since it is possible to suppress the transfer to the second storage area, it is possible to reduce the load on the sub-control means.

In the game machine F1, the sub-control means is the second of the third storage means to which the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred by the second transfer process. The predetermined sub-storage area of the area is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the second effect is displayed on the image display means for a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the display number determination means. A game machine F2 characterized by having an overwrite control means.

According to the game machine F2, a predetermined sub-storage area possessed by the second area of the third storage means to which the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred by the second transfer process. Based on the determination by the display number determination means, the overwrite control means controls the second effect until the second effect is displayed on the image display means for a predetermined number of times so that the second effect is not overwritten by other image data. As a result, once the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is stored in a predetermined sub-storage area of the second area of the third storage means, the second effect is an image. Since it is not overwritten by other image data until it is displayed on the display means a predetermined number of times, the image data stored in the predetermined sub storage area of the second area of the third storage means by the one transfer is used. The second effect can be displayed on the image display means a predetermined number of times. Therefore, every time the second effect is displayed on the second effect display means, the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is repeatedly repeated from the first storage means to the third storage means. Since the transfer to the two storage areas can be suppressed more reliably, the load on the sub-control means can be further reduced.

In the game machine F1, the sub-control means includes an image type discriminating means for discriminating the type of image data stored in the second region of the third storage means, and the second transfer process determines the number of display times. When the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the second or later based on the determination by the means, the second storage of the third storage means is based on the result of the determination by the image type determination means. If the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is not stored in the area, the image data is stored from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. A game machine F3 characterized by transferring the image.

According to the game machine F3, when the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the second or later based on the determination by the display number determination means, the third is based on the result of the determination by the image type determination means. If the image data necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is not stored in the second storage area of the storage means, the second transfer process execution means that executes the second transfer process first The image data is transferred from the storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, it is necessary for the image display means to display the second effect transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means when the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the first time. Even if a situation occurs in which the image data is overwritten, the image control means can display the second effect on the image display means without any problem.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the setting means has the second effect on the image display means in the same manner in each of the first effects for the number of times the second effect is added. A game machine F4 characterized in that the second effect is set to be feasible so as to be displayed.

According to the game machine F4, the second effect is displayed on the image display means in the same manner in each of the first effects for the number of times of waiting for the second effect to be added. The effect of 2 is set to be feasible. Then, according to the configuration described in the game machine F1, when the number of times of display of the second effect by the second effect display means is the first time, the first transfer process execution means that executes the second transfer process can display the first effect. One image data necessary for displaying the second effect added to the effect in the same manner on the image display means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. Therefore, when the number of times the second effect is displayed by the second effect display means is the second or later, the image data of 1 transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means at the time of the first display is used. The image control means can display the second effect on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data of 1 from being repeatedly transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, so that the load on the sub-control means can be reduced.

In any of the game machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4, the sub-control means is stored in the second area of the third storage means. An image type discriminating means for discriminating the type of image data is provided, and in the second transfer process, one of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is controlled by the image controlling means. If the one image data is stored in the second area of the third storage means based on the result of discrimination by the image type discriminating means, the first storage means to the third storage means. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the transfer of the one image data to the second storage area of the means is not executed.

According to the game machine G1, when one of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, it is based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means. If the image data of the one is stored in the second area of the third storage means, the second storage process execution means that executes the second transfer process causes the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. Since the transfer of the image data of one navel is not executed, the image data already stored in the second area of the third storage means is duplicated from the first storage means to the second area of the third storage means. It is possible to suppress the transfer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load.

In the game machine G1, the image control means subdivides a series of images to be displayed on the image display means into elements, and when displaying a predetermined image, determines the elements constituting the predetermined image. The image is controlled in the element unit, and the image discriminating means discriminates the type of image data stored in the second region of the third storage means in the element unit, and the second transfer process. Is used as the result of discrimination by the image type discriminating means when the image data corresponding to one element of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image controlling means. Based on this, if the image data corresponding to the one element is not stored in the second area of the third storage means, the first storage means moves to the second storage area of the third storage means. If the image data corresponding to the element is transferred and the image data corresponding to the one element is stored in the second area of the third storage means, the first storage means to the third storage means. The gaming machine G2, characterized in that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the one element to the second storage area is not executed.

According to the game machine G2, the image control means subdivides a series of images to be displayed on the image display means into elements, and when a predetermined image is displayed, the elements constituting the predetermined image are determined. The image is controlled for each element. Here, when the image data corresponding to one element of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means. If the image data corresponding to one element is not stored in the second area of the third storage means, the second transfer process execution means that executes the second transfer process causes the first storage means to the third storage means. 2 Image data corresponding to one element is transferred to the storage area. On the other hand, if the image data corresponding to one element is stored in the second area of the third storage means, the second transfer processing execution means moves the image data from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the element is not executed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the image data corresponding to the second storage area of the third storage means is stored for each element, and accordingly, the first to third storage means of the image data corresponding to the element are stored. Since the execution of transfer of the storage means to the second storage area is controlled, that is, the presence or absence of transfer of image data is finely controlled, an increase in processing load can be efficiently suppressed.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the second storage area of the third storage means has a plurality of sub storage areas, and the second transfer process is one that is not held in the storage area of the second storage means. When the image data is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, the one image data from the plurality of sub storage areas is selected according to the type of the one image data. A game machine H1 characterized in that a sub-storage area for storing a device is determined.

According to the game machine H1, when one image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, the second transfer process is performed. Since the sub storage area for storing the one image data is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image data, the image data stored in the sub storage area is not immediately overwritten. As described above, a predetermined type of image data can be stored in each sub storage area. As a result, when one image data is used for image control by the image control means, the possibility that the image data is stored in the sub storage area can be increased, so that the first storage means to the third storage means can be stored. The number of times the image data is transferred to the second storage area of the means can be suppressed, and an increase in the processing load can be efficiently suppressed.

In the game machine H1, the plurality of sub-storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are configured so that the number of types of image data to be stored differs for each of the sub-storage areas. In the second transfer process, when a sub storage area for storing one image data is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image data, the one image data is frequently used. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the more image data is used, the smaller the number of types of image data to be stored is determined to be stored in the sub storage area.

According to the game machine H2, the plurality of sub storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are configured so that the number of types of image data to be stored differs for each of the sub storage areas. In the second transfer process, when a sub storage area for storing one image data is determined from a plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image data, the one image data is frequently used. It is determined that the more image data is stored, the smaller the number of types of image data to be stored is stored in the sub-storage area. As a result, the probability that frequently used image data is overwritten can be reduced, so that the number of times the image data is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means can be suppressed, and the processing can be performed. The increase in load can be suppressed efficiently.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the plurality of sub-storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are further divided into one or more divided areas capable of storing image data, and the sub-storage areas are further divided. The number of the divided areas is different for each, and in the second transfer process, the sub storage area for storing one image data is stored in the plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image data. When deciding from the area, the more frequently the one image data is used, the more the one image data is determined to be stored in the sub storage area having a large number of the divided areas. The game machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, the plurality of sub-storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are further divided into one or more divided areas that can store image data, and the sub-storage areas are further divided. The number of areas is configured to be different, and in the second transfer process, a sub storage area for storing one image data is determined from a plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image data. In the case, it is determined that the more frequently the one image data is used, the more the one image data is stored in the sub storage area having a large number of divided areas. As a result, the probability that frequently used image data is overwritten can be reduced, so that the number of times the image data is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means can be suppressed, and the processing can be performed. The increase in load can be suppressed efficiently.

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1, C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, in the first storage area of the second storage means. The game machine I1 characterized in that the retained image information is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means.

According to the game machine I1, image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the first storage area of the second storage means, so that the image display means displays the image. Since it is not necessary to read the image information from the first storage means each time, the frequently displayed image can be surely displayed at a desired time.

In any one of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1, C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, I1, the first storage of the second storage means. The image information to be held in the region is an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means under the control of the sub control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means. A game machine I2 characterized by being image information for display.

The signal input to the sub-control means may be an input signal from various sensors such as a vibration sensor provided in the game machine and a game medium detection sensor for detecting the game medium input to the game machine. It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be immediately displayed on the image display means may be, for example, an image for notifying an error or a back image displayed on the image display means.

According to the game machine I2, an image for displaying an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means under the control of the sub control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means. Since the information is stored in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image to be displayed immediately is displayed after the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub control means is input. The image can be controlled by the image control means by using the image information held in the second storage means without reading the image information to be stored from the first storage means. Therefore, the image to be displayed immediately can be surely displayed at a desired time.

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1, I1, I2, the first storage means is NAND. A game machine I3 characterized by being composed of a type flash memory.

According to the game machine I3, the first storage means is configured by a NAND flash memory. Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area and is inexpensive. Therefore, the capacity of the first storage means should be increased while suppressing an increase in cost. Can be done. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first storage means, the image to be displayed on the image display means can be diversified and complicated, and the player's interest can be improved. Can be improved. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that the read speed is slower than that of other memories, but from the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1. According to the configuration described in any one of F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, I1, I2, the image control means displays an image using the image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation. Since the image to be displayed on the means is controlled, even if the first storage means is configured by the NAND flash memory, a predetermined image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem while diversifying and complicating the image to be displayed on the image display means.

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine I4 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. The game machine is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine I5 characterized by being present. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1, G2, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine I6 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a slot machine, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, the image information of the image to be displayed on the display device is stored in the storage means in advance, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read from the storage means to perform image processing. After applying the image, the image is displayed on a display device (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598).
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the display device has become diversified and complicated. As a storage means for storing image information of such an image, there is a demand that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area and an inexpensive one can be used.
However, some inexpensive storage means that can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area have a slow speed for reading information (reading speed), and when such a storage means is used, an image to be displayed can be specified. After that, if the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means, there is a problem that the image to be displayed may not be generated in time by the time to be displayed, and the image may not be displayed at that time.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and even if a storage means having a slow read speed is used as a storage means for image information, the image is displayed without any problem at the desired time. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be made to operate.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the slot machine of the technical idea 1 has a main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a sub control thereof. An image display means for displaying an image based on control by the means is provided, and the sub-control means includes a first storage means in which image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored. The second storage means, which is capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means and has a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means, and at least the second storage means. An image control means that controls an image to be displayed on the image display means based on the stored image information, and the second storage means that stores the image information stored in the first storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power. The first storage area of the second storage means is provided with a first transfer processing execution means for executing the first transfer process to be transferred to the first storage area, and the first storage area of the second storage means is said to be at least until a predetermined opportunity is settled. The image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means is retained.
The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all the image information stored in the first storage means, or some images. It may be information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is an image based on a main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a control by the sub control means. The sub-control means is provided with an image display means for displaying the image, and the sub-control means is obtained from a first storage means in which image information for displaying an image in the image display means is stored and a first storage means thereof. Is capable of high-speed reading operation, and is based on a second storage means having a first storage area for storing image information stored in the first storage means, and at least the image information stored in the second storage means. The image control means that controls the image to be displayed on the image display means, and the image information stored in the first storage means when the power is turned on to the first storage area of the second storage means. The first transfer process executing means for executing the first transfer process to be transferred is provided, and the first storage area of the second storage means is provided by the first transfer process executing means at least until a predetermined opportunity is settled. The transferred image information is retained.
The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all the image information stored in the first storage means, or some images. It may be information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. The sub-control means can be read out at a higher speed than the first storage means, and is stored in the first storage means. A third storage means having a second storage area for storing image information is provided, and the image control means displays on the image display means based on at least image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means. In the first transfer process, a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage of the second storage means when the power is turned on to start up. When the sub-control means uses the image information that has not been transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means for controlling the image by the image control means, the sub-control means uses the image information. A second transfer processing execution means for executing a second transfer process for transferring the image information from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in which the sub-control means is an image type determining means for determining the type of image data stored in the second area of the third storage means. The second transfer process is performed by the image type determining means when one of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means. Based on the result of the determination, if the one image data is stored in the second area of the third storage means, the first storage means moves to the second storage area of the third storage means. The transfer of image data is not executed.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine described in the technical idea 4, and the image control means subdivides a series of images to be displayed on the image display means into elements and displays a predetermined image. , The elements constituting the predetermined image are discriminated, and the image is controlled in the element unit. The image discriminating means is stored in the second area of the third storage means in the element unit. The type of the image data is determined, and in the second transfer process, the image data corresponding to one element of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is controlled by the image control means. When used, if the image data corresponding to the one element is not stored in the second region of the third storage means based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means, the first storage means to the said If the image data corresponding to the one element is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means, and the image data corresponding to the one element is stored in the second area of the third storage means. , The transfer of the image data corresponding to the one element from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is not executed.
<Effect>
According to the slot machine described in Technical Idea 1, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image stored in the first storage means. The information is transferred by the first transfer processing executing means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power. Then, in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information transferred by the first transfer processing executing means is held at least until a predetermined opportunity is set, and the first storage area of the second storage means is held. Based on the image information held in the image control means, the image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display the image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation. Since the image is controlled, there is an effect that the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image stored in the first storage means. The information is transferred by the first transfer processing executing means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power. Then, in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information transferred by the first transfer processing executing means is held at least until a predetermined opportunity is set, and the first storage area of the second storage means is held. Based on the image information held in the image control means, the image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display the image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed read operation. Since the image is controlled, there is an effect that the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, some of the image information stored in the first storage means stands up when the power is turned on. At the time of raising, the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means, and transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means at least until a predetermined opportunity is settled. Be retained. On the other hand, when the image information that has not been transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the image information is transferred by the second transfer processing execution means before the image information is used. , Transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the image control means is transferred to the image information held in the second storage means and the third storage means capable of high-speed read operation even if the memory having a slow read speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is controlled by using the image information, there is an effect that the image can be displayed at the desired time without any problem. Further, since a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage area of the second storage means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second storage means. It has the effect of being able to.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, one of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is subjected to the image data by the image control means. When used for image control, if the one image data is stored in the second area of the third storage means based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means, the second transfer for executing the second transfer process is executed. Since the transfer of the one image data from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is not executed by the processing execution means, the image already stored in the second area of the third storage means is not executed. It is possible to prevent the data from being duplicated and transferred from the first storage means to the second area of the third storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the processing load can be suppressed.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 4, a series of images to be displayed on the image display means are subdivided and elementized by the image control means, and a predetermined When an image is displayed, the elements constituting the predetermined image are determined, and the image is controlled for each element. Here, when the image data corresponding to one element of the image data not held in the storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means. If the image data corresponding to one element is not stored in the second area of the third storage means, the second transfer process execution means that executes the second transfer process causes the first storage means to the third storage means. 2 Image data corresponding to one element is transferred to the storage area. On the other hand, if the image data corresponding to one element is stored in the second area of the third storage means, the second transfer processing execution means moves the image data from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the element is not executed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the image data corresponding to the second storage area of the third storage means is stored for each element, and accordingly, the first to third storage means of the image data corresponding to the element are stored. Since the execution of transfer of the storage means to the second storage area is controlled, that is, the presence or absence of transfer of image data is finely controlled, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be efficiently suppressed.

10 slot machine (game machine)
65 Auxiliary display unit (image display means)
81 Display control device (secondary control means)
101 Main control device (main control means)
187a NAND flash memory (first storage means)
188 Image controller (image control means)
188a Buffer RAM (4th storage means, 5th storage means)
189 Resident video RAM (second storage means)
190 Normal video RAM (third storage means)
200 Pachinko machine (game machine)
218 Third symbol display device (image display means)
222 Frame button (operation means)
310 Main control unit (main control means)
313 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means)
314 Display control device (part of sub control means)
423a Hold count counter (storage means)
434a NAND flash memory (first storage means)
435 Resident video RAM (second storage means)
436 Normal video RAM (third storage means)
436a First priority image A area (part of sub area, divided area)
436b First priority image B area (part of sub area, divided area)
436c Second priority image C area (part of sub area, divided area)
436d Second priority image D area (part of sub area, divided area)
436f Normal image F area (part of sub area, divided area)
436g Normal image G area (part of sub area, divided area)
437 image controller (image control means)
437a Buffer RAM (4th storage means, 5th storage means)
S702-S710 (first transfer process)
S708 (1st determination means, 3rd determination means)
S1206 Fluctuation start processing (selection means)
S1401 (detection means)
S1404 (acquisition means)
S1405-S1410 (Direction determination means)
S1407, S1409 (permitted transmission means)
S2209 Continuous notice judgment processing (setting means)
S2203 Continuous notice setting process (second effect display means)
S2205 (first effect display means)
S2302, S2303 (part of the first transfer process)
S2523 (Display count determination means)
S2602 Resident image transfer command processing (part of the first transfer processing)
S2410 (part of rear image changing means)
S2526 (Part of rear image changing means, rear image display means)
S2603 Normal image transfer instruction processing (second transfer processing)
S3003, S3008 (image type discrimination means)
S3011 (overwrite control means)
S3208 (1st determination means, 2nd determination means, 3rd determination means)

Claims (1)

A main control means that performs the main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means that displays an image based on the control by the sub-control means. In a game machine that dynamically displays identification information by the image display means.
The sub-control means
A first storage means in which image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored, and
A second storage means that can perform a read operation faster than the first storage means and stores image information stored in the first storage means, and a second storage means.
A third storage means that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the first storage means and stores image information stored in the first storage means, and a third storage means.
An image control means that controls an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means.
A first transfer processing execution means for executing a first transfer process for transferring a part of image information stored in the first storage means to the second storage means.
When the image information not held in the second storage means is used for controlling the image by the image control means, the image information is transferred from the first storage means to the third storage means before the image information is used. A second transfer process execution means for executing the second transfer process to be transferred, and
A determination means for determining the type of image information stored in the third storage means, and a determination means for determining the type of image information.
A first display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the main control means from a plurality of display modes, and
Information indicating an image to be displayed in the display type and image information to be transferred to the third storage means among the image information used for image control by the image control means are provided for each of the plurality of display types. The first specified information storage means for storing the first specified information indicating the information to be transferred, and
The first selection means for selecting the first specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the first display specifying means from the first specified information storage means is provided.
The second storage means retains the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined opportunity is reached.
The image information transferred to the third storage means is retained until it is overwritten by another image information.
The image control means controls an image to be displayed on the image display means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means.
The first transfer process includes at least a part of image information necessary for displaying a back image to be displayed on the back side of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the image display means, and the first storage means. To the second storage means
The second transfer processing executing means identifies image information to be transferred to the third storage means based on the first specified information selected by the first selection means, and uses the image information as the image control means. The second transfer process is executed so as to transfer the image information from the first storage means to the third storage means before the image information is to be transferred to the third storage means. If it is stored in the third storage means based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the second transfer process is not executed.
The sub-control means
It is provided with a fourth storage means that is used at least when the second transfer process is executed and is temporarily stored before the image information read from the first storage means is written to the third storage means. A game machine characterized by that.

Images